GE Grid Solutions F60 Скачать руководство пользователя | Manualshive

Страница: 217 / 740

background image

GE Multilin

F60 Feeder Protection System

5-79

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:

Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.

After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS



PRODUCT SETUP



USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS



TRIP & ALARM LEDS

The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.

d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS



PRODUCT SETUP



USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS



USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.

For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.

•

LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24

•

LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48

For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.

•

LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12

•

LED column 3: user-programmable LEDs 13 through 24

•

LED column 4: user-programmable LEDs 25 through 36

•

LED column 5: user-programmable LEDs 37 through 48

See the

LED Indicators

section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.

The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the

LED 1 TYPE

setting is “Self-

Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the

LED 1 TYPE

setting is

“Latched”, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communica-
tions channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.



TRIP & ALARM LEDS



TRIP LED INPUT:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

ALARM LED INPUT:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand



USER-PROGRAMMABLE



LED 1

LED 1 OPERAND:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

LED 1 TYPE:

Self-Reset

Range: Self-Reset, Latched

«
...
215
216
217
218
219
...
»

Содержание F60

Страница 1: ...A5 GEK 119559D GE Grid Solutions 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEGridSolutions com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO 9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0093 AA5 GE Grid Solutions LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 ...

Страница 2: ...Fiber Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part number 1601 0093 ...

Страница 3: ...7 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY 1 17 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 18 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 18 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 18 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 19 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 SECURITY 2 2 2 1 3 IEC 870 5 103 PROTOCOL 2 7 2 2 ORDER CODES 2 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 8 2 2 2 ORDER CODES WITH ENHANCED CT VT MODULES 2 8 2 2 3 ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES 2 11 2 2 4 REPLACEM...

Страница 4: ...NG A SITE LIST 4 1 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW 4 1 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW 4 3 4 1 5 SETTINGS TEMPLATES 4 4 4 1 6 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS 4 8 4 1 7 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY 4 10 4 2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 2 1 FACEPLATE 4 13 4 2 2 LED INDICATORS 4 14 4 2 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS 4 17 4 2 4 DISPLAY 4 22 4 2 5 BREAKER CONTROL 4 22 4 2 6 KEYPAD 4 23 4 2 7 MENUS 4 ...

Страница 5: ...WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 5 190 5 6 7 GROUND CURRENT 5 194 5 6 8 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT 5 201 5 6 9 BREAKER FAILURE ANSI 50BF 50NBF 5 208 5 6 10 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 217 5 6 11 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ANSI 32 5 225 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 7 1 OVERVIEW 5 228 5 7 2 TRIP BUS 5 228 5 7 3 SETTING GROUPS 5 230 5 7 4 SELECTOR SWITCH 5 232 5 7 5 UNDERFREQUENCY ANSI 81U 5 238 5 7 6 OVERFREQUENCY ANSI 81O...

Страница 6: ...6 DIRECT INPUTS 6 9 6 2 17 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS 6 10 6 2 18 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS 6 10 6 2 19 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS 6 10 6 2 20 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS 6 11 6 2 21 INCIPIENT FAULT DETECTOR 6 12 6 2 22 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS 6 12 6 2 23 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP 6 12 6 3 METERING 6 3 1 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 14 6 3 2 SOURCES 6 17 6 3 3 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 6 23 6 3 4 SYNCH...

Страница 7: ...ORITHM 8 3 8 1 8 LOAD EXTRACTION ALGORITHM 8 3 8 1 9 ARC BURST PATTERN ANALYSIS ALGORITHM 8 3 8 1 10 ARCING SUSPECTED ALGORITHM 8 3 8 1 11 OVERCURRENT DISTURBANCE MONITORING 8 3 8 1 12 HI Z EVEN HARMONIC RESTRAINT ALGORITHM 8 3 8 1 13 HI Z VOLTAGE SUPERVISION ALGORITHM 8 4 8 2 FAULT LOCATOR 8 2 1 FAULT TYPE DETERMINATION 8 5 9 COMMISSIONING 9 1 TESTING 9 1 1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENC...

Страница 8: ...ALUES FROM GOOSE DATA C 3 C 2 5 GGIO4 GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 3 C 2 6 MMXU ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 4 C 2 7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES C 4 C 3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C 3 1 BUFFERED UNBUFFERED REPORTING C 6 C 3 2 FILE TRANSFER C 6 C 3 3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING C 6 C 3 4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME C 6 C 3 5 LOCATION C 6 C 3 6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES C 7 C 3 7 CONNECTION TIMIN...

Страница 9: ...E 1 2 IEC 60870 5 104 POINT LIST E 9 F DNP COMMUNICATIONS F 1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT F 1 1 DNP V3 00 DEVICE PROFILE F 1 F 1 2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE F 4 F 2 DNP POINT LISTS F 2 1 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 F 2 2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT F 9 F 2 3 COUNTERS F 10 F 2 4 ANALOG INPUTS F 11 G RADIUS SERVER G 1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION G 1 1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION G 1 H MISCELLANEOUS H 1 CHANG...

Страница 10: ...x F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Страница 11: ...e thoroughly familiar with all safety cau tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country regional utility and plant safety regulations Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers voltage transformers control and test circuit terminals Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to attempting work on the device H...

Страница 12: ...are missing contact GE Grid Solutions as fol lows GE GRID SOLUTIONS CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT GE Grid Solutions 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 TELEPHONE Worldwide 1 905 927 7070 Europe Middle East Africa 34 94 485 88 54 North America toll free 1 800 547 8629 FAX 1 905 927 5098 E MAIL Worldwide multilin tech ge com Europe multilin tech euro ge com H...

Страница 13: ...ES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard wired contacts Both wet and dry contacts are supported The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR series internal logic signals Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device Vi...

Страница 14: ...e use of objects and classes An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates data A class is the generalized form of similar objects By using this approach one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class such as time overcurrent instantaneous overcurrent current differential undervoltage overvoltage underfrequency an...

Страница 15: ...VD drive The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the F60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met install the software from the GE EnerVista DVD Or download th...

Страница 16: ...he UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown Figure 1 5 UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE F60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW You connect remotely to the F60 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software The F60 can also be accessed locally with ...

Страница 17: ...hen select the new site to re open the Device Setup window 6 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 7 Enter a name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 8 Select Serial from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for serial communications Figure 1 6 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9 Enter the COM po...

Страница 18: ...tup window 16 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 17 Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 18 Select Ethernet from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality Figure 1 7 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 19 Enter the relay IP address specified i...

Страница 19: ...click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communi cations to the F60 device This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the F60 model number b USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the F60 from a computer through Ethernet first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard 1 Press the MEN...

Страница 20: ...dows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list and click the Properties button 4 Click the Use the following IP address box ...

Страница 21: ...ime and TTL vary depending on local network configuration 5 If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 1 1 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip time in milliseconds Minimum 0ms Maximum 0ms...

Страница 22: ...ection specific DNS suffix IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS suffix IP Address 1 1 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway C WINNT Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer 1 Start the Internet Explorer software 2 Select the Tools I...

Страница 23: ...he Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown If this computer is used to connect to...

Страница 24: ... green status indicator 3 The Display Properties settings can now be edited printed or changed See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are often performed when u...

Страница 25: ...trator Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer or Administrator and Supervisor when device authentication is disabled When using a serial connection only device authentication is supported When server authentication is required characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured on the UR This is possible only through the EnerVista software The RADIUS server itself also must be...

Страница 26: ...al cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the F60 rear communications port The converter terminals GND are connected to the F60 communication module COM terminals See the CPU Communica tion Ports section in chapter 3 for details The line is terminated with an R C network that is 120 Ω 1 nF as described in the chapter 3 1 4 3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are ...

Страница 27: ...en then 0 then then 0 then then 1 To save the address press the ENTER key 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings Commands Targets User displays when enabled 1 5 3 MENU HI...

Страница 28: ...signed to specific personnel There are two user security access levels COMMAND and SETTING 1 COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations Operate breakers via faceplate keypad Change state of virtual inputs Clear event records Clear oscillography records Operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETTING ...

Страница 29: ...nding system 2 Visual verification of active alarms relay display messages and LED indications 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog inputs injection test and metering accuracy verification...

Страница 30: ...1 20 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 1 5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED 1 ...

Страница 31: ...e connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115 2 kbps All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol The IEC 60870 5 103 protocol is supported on the RS485 interface IEC 60870 5 103 DNP and Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously on this interface Also only one of the DNP IEC 60870 5 103 and IEC 60870 5 104 protocols can be enabled at any time on the relay When the IEC 60870 5 103 protoco...

Страница 32: ...Breaker restrike Fault locator Thermal overload protection Broken conductor detection FlexElements 8 Time synchronization over IRIG B or IEEE 1588 Cold load pickup FlexLogic equations Time synchronization over SNTP Contact inputs up to 96 High impedance fault detection Hi Z Transducer inputs and outputs Contact outputs up to 64 IEC 60870 5 103 communications optional User definable displays Contro...

Страница 33: ... password supervision Changing any setting Test mode operation The F60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port This include...

Страница 34: ... Example Administrative functions can be segmented away from common operator functions or engineering type access all of which are defined by separate roles as shown in the following figure so that access of UR devices by multiple per sonnel within a substation is allowed Figure 2 2 CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES The table lists the roles that are supported and their corresponding capabilities Table 2 3 P...

Страница 35: ...emote Inputs RW RW R R R Remote DPS input RW RW R R R Remote Output DNA Bit Pair RW RW R R R Remote Output user Bit Pair RW RW R R R Resetting RW RW R R R Direct Inputs RW RW R R R Direct Outputs RW RW R R R Teleprotection RW RW R R R Direct Analogs RW RW R R R Direct Integers RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Analogs RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Integers RW RW R R R Transducer I O RW RW R R R Testing RW R...

Страница 36: ...utable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons use RADIUS authentication only When the Server Authentication Type option is selected the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication database to authenticate the user No password or security information are displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device nor are they ever tr...

Страница 37: ...The IEC 60870 5 103 is an unbalanced master slave protocol for coded bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system In the context of this protocol the protection equipment is the slave and the control system is the master The communication is based on a point to point principle The master must be able to interpret the IEC 60870 5 103 communication messages The UR implementa...

Страница 38: ...d Ethernet Global Data EGD B6 IEEE 1588 and phasor measurement unit PMU B7 IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit PMU C0 Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP C1 PRP and Ethernet Global Data C3 PRP and IEC 61850 C4 PRP Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 C6 PRP and PMU C7 PRP IEC 61850 and PMU D0 IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 D1 IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data EGD...

Страница 39: ...C outputs 6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 digital inputs 6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital input...

Страница 40: ... and PMU F0 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1 F1 PRP CyberSentry Lvl1 and Ethernet Global Data F3 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 F4 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 F6 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and PMU F7 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU G0 IEEE 1588 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl 1 G1 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data G3 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 6...

Страница 41: ...nnel 2H IEEE C37 94 820 nm 128 kbps multimode LED 2 Channels 2I Channel 1 IEEE C37 94 MM 64 128 kbps Channel 2 1300 nm single mode Laser 2J Channel 1 IEEE C37 94 MM 64 128 kbps Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 72 1550 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 73 1550 nm single mode Laser 2 Channel 74 Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser...

Страница 42: ...to 48 V DC power supply PROCESS BUS MODULE 81 Eight port digital process bus module DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module 4A 4A 4 Solid State no monitoring MOSFET outputs 4B 4B 4 Solid State voltage with optional current MOSFET outputs 4C 4C 4 Solid State current with optional voltage MOSFET outputs 4D 4D 16 digital inputs with Auto Burnishing maximum of three modules within a case 4L 4L...

Страница 43: ... Lvl1 and Ethernet Global Data F3 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 F4 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data and IEC 61850 F6 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and PMU F7 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU G0 IEEE 1588 PRP and CyberSentry Lvl 1 G1 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global Data G3 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 G4 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Ethernet Global...

Страница 44: ... 64 128 kbps Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 72 1550 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 73 1550 nm single mode Laser 2 Channel 74 Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode Laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm Single mode Laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 1 Channel 77 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 2 Channels 7A 820 nm multimode LED 1 Channel 7B 1300 nm multimode...

Страница 45: ... 2 1300 nm single mode Laser 7Q Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm single mode Laser 7R G 703 1 Channel 7S G 703 2 Channels 7T RS422 1 Channel 7W RS422 2 Channels TRANSDUCER INPUTS OUTPUTS 5A 4 DCmA inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5A module is allowed 5C 8 RTD inputs 5D 4 RTD inputs 4 DCmA outputs only one 5D module is allowed 5E 4 DCmA inputs 4 RTD inputs 5F 8 DCmA inputs When an 8Z module is order...

Страница 46: ... 7D 1300 nm single mode Laser 1 Channel 7E Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 820 nm multimode 7F Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm multimode 7G Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm single mode ELED 7H 820 nm multimode LED 2 Channels 7I 1300 nm multimode LED 2 Channels 7J 1300 nm single mode ELED 2 Channels 7K 1300 nm single mode Laser 2 Channels 7L Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 820 nm multimode LED 7M Channel 1 ...

Страница 47: ...Hz systems and 3200 Hz in 50 Hz sys tems The sampling rate is dynamically adjusted to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast frequency tracking system The A D converter has the following ranges of AC signals Voltages EQ 2 1 Currents From CT VT U I Analog Inputs Analog low pass filter Analog to Digital Converter A Digital band pass filter DSP module Phasor estimation cycle Fourier 1 cy...

Страница 48: ...e same direction negative to positive Voltage or current samples are pre filtered using a Finite Impulse Response FIR digital filter to remove high frequency noise contained in the signal The period is used after several security conditions are met such as true RMS signal must be above 6 nominal for a certain time and others If these security conditions are not met the last valid measurement is us...

Страница 49: ... Timed per IEEE Curve timing accuracy at 1 03 to 20 x pickup 3 5 of operate time or cycle whichever is greater from pickup to operate Voltage restraint modifies pickup current for voltage in the range of 0 1 V 0 9 VT Nominal in a fixed linear relationship PHASE NEUTRAL GROUND IOC Pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 1 to 2 0 CT rating ...

Страница 50: ...RIC ZERO SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL Measured power zero sequence Number of elements 2 Characteristic angle 0 to 360 in steps of 1 Minimum power 0 001 to 1 200 pu in steps of 0 001 Pickup level accuracy 1 or 0 0025 pu whichever is greater Hysteresis 3 or 0 001 pu whichever is greater Pickup delay definite time 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 inverse time or FlexCurve Inverse time multiplier 0 01 to 2 00 s...

Страница 51: ...hange typically 3 cycles at 0 5 Hz s change Typical times are average operate times including variables such as frequency change instance test method etc and may vary by 0 5 cycles OVERFREQUENCY Pickup level 20 00 to 65 00 Hz in steps of 0 01 Dropout level pickup 0 03 Hz Level accuracy 0 001 Hz Time delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 1 4 cycle whichever is gr...

Страница 52: ... settings after each shot with FlexLogic LOAD ENCROACHMENT Responds to Positive sequence quantities Minimum voltage 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Reach sec Ω 0 02 to 250 00 Ω in steps of 0 01 Impedance accuracy 5 Angle 5 to 50 in steps of 1 Angle accuracy 2 Pickup delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Reset delay 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 1 4 cycle w...

Страница 53: ...anel 16 on enhanced horizontal front panel 6 on enhanced vertical front panel Mode self reset latched Display message 2 lines of 20 characters each Drop out timer 0 00 to 60 00 s in steps of 0 05 Autoreset timer 0 2 to 600 0 s in steps of 0 1 Hold timer 0 0 to 10 0 s in steps of 0 1 SELECTOR SWITCH Number of elements 2 Upper position limit 1 to 7 in steps of 1 Selecting mode time out or acknowledg...

Страница 54: ...magnitude 2 4 4 METERING RMS CURRENT PHASE NEUTRAL AND GROUND Accuracy at 0 1 to 2 0 CT rating 0 25 of reading or 0 1 of rated whichever is greater 2 0 CT rating 1 0 of reading RMS VOLTAGE Accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V REAL POWER WATTS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 1 0 PF 0 8 and 0 8 PF 10 REACTIVE POWER VARS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT ...

Страница 55: ...64 samples per power cycle Tracking frequency range 20 to 70 Hz CONTACT INPUTS Dry contacts 1000 Ω maximum Wet contacts 300 V DC maximum Selectable thresholds 17 V 33 V 84 V 166 V Tolerance 10 Contacts per common return 4 Recognition time 1 ms Debounce time 0 0 to 16 0 ms in steps of 0 5 Continuous current draw 4 mA when energized CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO BURNISHING Dry contacts 1000 Ω maximum Wet...

Страница 56: ...voltage 88 V Maximum DC voltage 300 V Nominal AC voltage 100 to 240 V at 50 60 Hz Minimum AC voltage 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz Maximum AC voltage 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz Voltage loss hold up 200 ms duration at maximum load ALL RANGES Volt withstand 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms Power consumption typical 15 to 20 W VA maximum 45 W VA contact factory for exact order code con sumption INTERNAL FUSE RA...

Страница 57: ...ts 32 DIRECT OUTPUTS Output points 32 DCMA OUTPUTS Range 1 to 1 mA 0 to 1 mA 4 to 20 mA Max load resistance 12 kΩ for 1 to 1 mA range 12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range 600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range Accuracy 0 75 of full scale for 0 to 1 mA range 0 5 of full scale for 1 to 1 mA range 0 75 of full scale for 0 to 20 mA range 99 Settling time to a step change 100 ms Isolation 1 5 kV Driving signal any FlexAnalog...

Страница 58: ...TM2011 Slave only ordinary clock Peer delay measurement mechanism PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP IEC 62439 3 CLAUSE 4 2012 Ethernet ports used 2 and 3 Networks supported 10 100 MB Ethernet OTHER TFTP HTTP IEC 60870 5 104 Ethernet Global Data EGD 2 4 9 INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into considerati...

Страница 59: ... 125 μm 16 dBm 32 dBm 16 dBm 8 dBm 50 125 μm 20 dBm 12 dBm 1300 nm Multimode 62 5 125 μm 16 dBm 32 dBm 16 dBm 8 dBm 50 125 μm 20 dBm 12 dBm 1300 nm Single mode 9 125 μm 15 dBm 32 dBm 17 dBm 8 dBm 1300 nm Laser Single mode 9 125 μm 0 dBm 34 dBm 34 dBm 8 dBm 1550 nm Laser Single mode 9 125 μm 5 dBm 34 dBm 39 dBm 10 dBm EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET MAX OPTICAL I...

Страница 60: ...nt 1 6 days OTHER Altitude 2000 m maximum Pollution degree II Overvoltage category II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back Noise 0 dB Typical distances listed are based on the follow ing assumptions for system loss As actual losses vary from one installation to another the distance covered by your system may vary CONNECTOR LOSSES TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS ST connector 0 7 dB each FIBER LOSSES 820 nm m...

Страница 61: ...e DC IEC 60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC 60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC 60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 10 Level 4 Voltage dip and interruption IE...

Страница 62: ...ing is not required but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000 6 5 C U...

Страница 63: ... removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits sem...

Страница 64: ...When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi flush with the panel or switchgear door allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws ...

Страница 65: ...243 4 mm 7 00 177 7 mm 4 00 101 6 mm 7 10 180 2 mm 13 66 347 0 mm 14 03 356 2 mm 0 20 5 1 mm 1 55 39 3 mm 4 Places 0 213 5 41 mm Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Front View Vertical Enhanced Top View Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel CUTOUT Front of Panel Reference only Terminal Blocks Front Bezel Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Side View 843809A2 cdr ...

Страница 66: ...R Device Instruction Sheet GEK 113182 Connecting a Remote UR V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically Mounted Horizontal UR Device Instruction Sheet For side mounting F60 devices with the standard front panel use the following figures 13 72 348 5 mm 7 00 177 8 mm 13 50 342 9 mm Front of panel Front bezel Panel Mounting bracket 1 57 39 9 mm 4 00 101 6 7 13 181 1 mm 0 46 11 7 mm 13 65 346 7 mm 14 40 3...

Страница 67: ...PANEL 10 32 NYLOCK NUT P N 1422 1032 4 PLACES 8 3 8 PAN PHILIPS HEAD BLACK OXIDE SCREW P N 1408 0306 8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT 8 LOCKWASHER EXTERNAL TOOTH P N 1435 0002 8 PLACES TO MOUNT STEP 4 ASSEMBLE UR V UNIT TO MOUNTING BRACKETS UR V UNIT STEP 1 CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT OUT INTO THE PANEL AS PER DRAWING 843753 PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO THE FRONT BEZEL BEFORE MOUNTING THE UNIT ON THE PANEL ...

Страница 68: ... REAR DIMENSIONS STANDARD PANEL C U T O U T 1 33 33 9 2 83 71 9 6 66 169 2 12 20 309 9 0 159 DIA 6 PLACES 4 0 0 213 DIA 5 4 4 PLACES SEE HOLES MARKED X INCHES MILLIMETERS 5 33 135 4 PANEL SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY VIEWED FROM FRONT X X X X 1 00 25 4 1 00 25 4 10 05 255 3 0 04 1 0 0 68 17 3 5 27 133 8 843753A3 cdr ...

Страница 69: ...block See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments Figure 3 9 EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS X W V U T S P N M L K J H D G F B R 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 b 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 a a b c a b c Optional direct input output module CPU module T module shown Optional HI Z CT or contact input output module CT VT module Power supply module Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 832782A3 CDR a b c Optional...

Страница 70: ...back of the relay chassis screws a b c shown is 9 inch pounds For the connections to the terminal blocks rows 1 to 8 use a minimum of 17 inch pounds During manufacturing the power supply and CPU modules are installed in slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch pounds of torque on the screws at the top and bottom of the modules ...

Страница 71: ...K DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUTS M1 M5 M2 M6 M3 M7 M4 M8 Optional 6C DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUTS P1 P5 P2 P6 P3 P7 P4 P8 P7a P1a P2b P7c P1c P7b P1b P8c P8b P2c P8a P2a P4a P5b P4c P6b P3b P3a P6a P4b P5c P5a P3c P6c U6a U8a U5b U7b U5a U7a U6c U8c U5c U7c CONTACT INPUT U1a CONTACT INPUT U4c COMMON U5b COMMON U7b COMMON U1b COMMON U3b CONTACT INPUT U2a CONTACT INPUT U5a CONTACT INPUT U3c CONTACT INPUT U6a CONT...

Страница 72: ... H6 H3 H4 H8a H7b H7a H8c H7c SURGE H8b 6C DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUTS P1 P5 P2 P6 P3 P7 P4 P8 P7a P1a P2b P7c P1c P7b P1b P8c P8b P2c P8a P2a P4a P5b P4c P6b P3b P3a P6a P4b P5c P5a P3c P6c M7c M8c M8b M8a M5c M5b M5a M7b M7a M3c M4b M4a M4c M1c M2b M2a M6b M6a M6c M2c M1b M1a M3b M3a CURRENT INPUTS NOT USED 8Z IA IB IC IG IA5 IA1 IB5 IC5 IG5 IB1 IC1 IG1 CONNECTION AS REQUIRED OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION...

Страница 73: ...nections The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure see t...

Страница 74: ...round current input that is the same as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used CT VT modules with a sensitive...

Страница 75: ...AD A B C N G Ground outside CT Source LOAD SHIELDED CABLE 996630A6 CDR A B C Source To ground must be on load side Stress cone shields NOTE 1a 1b 1c 2a 2b 2c 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 3b 4b 5c 6c 7c 8c 3c 4c Current inputs 8F and 8G modules 4 CTs and 4 VTs Voltage inputs VA VB VC VX VA VB VC VX IA IC IB IG IA5 IC5 IB5 IG5 IA1 IC1 IB1 IG1 Current inputs Not used 8Z module used for high impedance fault dete...

Страница 76: ...er system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR series applica tions including protection functions FlexLogic metering and communications The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits Reduces labor associated with design installation and testing of protection and control applications using the F60 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations In...

Страница 77: ...when it is open and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose out put is set to logic On when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting The voltage monitor is set to On when there is a voltage across open contact the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2 5 mA and the current monitor is set to On when the cur...

Страница 78: ... A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output Wherever a tilde symbol appears substitute with the slot position of the module wherever a number sign appears substitute the contact number When current monitoring is used to seal in the form A and solid state relay contact outputs the Flex Logic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to p...

Страница 79: ... C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6U MODULE 6V MODULE 67 MODULE 4A MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Not Used 2 Form A 2 Form A 2 Form A 2 Solid State 3 Form A 3 Form C...

Страница 80: ...3 18 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 3 2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 17 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 842762A3 CDR ...

Страница 81: ...8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b DIGITAL I O 6T 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c C...

Страница 82: ...t a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output We recommend using an external DC supply GENERAL APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS Contacts outputs of protective relays auxiliary contacts from breakers disconnectors and other devices are generally con nected to contacts inputs of protective relays In some situations the contact outputs of some protective relays can have high impedance connec...

Страница 83: ...and the input impedance of the contact input If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting then the contact input operates The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this problem by connecting a resistor across the contact input as shown in the next figure or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to prevent spurious operat...

Страница 84: ...lue of this resistor R is calculated as follows 1 Determine the minimum voltage V threshold required to turn on the input This is determined by direct measurement or referenced in the input specifications 2 Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1 3 V threshold when the contact is OFF the non activated state as follows R Vthreshold 3 2 mA EQ 3 2 The 2 mA current is used in case...

Страница 85: ... HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Vresistor 2 mA 14 Kohm 28 V Vresistor contact input threshold 84 V EQ 3 5 In conclusion in this example the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND when a battery ground is present ...

Страница 86: ...o burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing ...

Страница 87: ...dition During Low impedance state contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast discharge of the stray capacitance of the long cables When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance value If voltage starts rapidly decreasing this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input If how...

Страница 88: ...r input output module has a total of 24 terminal connections These connections are arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assigned...

Страница 89: ...GE Multilin F60 Feeder Protection System 3 27 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Figure 3 25 TRANSDUCER INPUT OUTPUT MODULE WIRING The following figure show how to connect RTDs 842764A1 CDR ...

Страница 90: ...tup software provided with the relay Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps Figure 3 27 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION Three wire shielded cable RTD terminals Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms for Platinum RTDs Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors RTD 859736A...

Страница 91: ...together Though data is transmitted over a two wire twisted pair all RS485 devices require a shared reference or common voltage This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common Some systems allow the shield drain wire to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the F60 COM terminal 3 others function cor rectly only if the common wire is connected to the F60 COM terminal but insu...

Страница 92: ...communication ports An iso lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling To ensure maximum reliability all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown below Figure 3 29 RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c 100BASE FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS Ensure that the dust covers are installe...

Страница 93: ...ons can be synchronized Figure 3 30 OPTIONS FOR THE IRIG B CONNECTION Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping The F60 is intended for use with external clocks that set the IRIG B control bits according to IEEE Std C37 118 1 2011 When used with a source that sets the IRIG B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344 1995 the source must have the sign of it...

Страница 94: ...NEL CONNECTION IRC modules with protocol C37 94 and G 703 are designed for back to back communication connections so the ring con figuration shown in the previous figure does not apply To establish inter relay communication in more than two URs you need to have two channel IRC module and enable DIRECT I O CHANNEL CROSSOVER function in all relays as shown in the next figure This configuration can b...

Страница 95: ...mmunication modules UR2 has a dual channel module The two communication chan nels can be of different types depending on the Type 7 modules used To allow the direct input and output data to cross over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2 the DIRECT I O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2 This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2 and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1 F...

Страница 96: ...7J fiber only modules Figure 3 35 LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3 3 3 FIBER LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72 73 7D and 7K fiber laser modules Figure 3 36 7X LASER FIBER MODULES 7A 7B and 7C modules 7H 7I and 7J modules 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831719A3 CDR 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831720A5 CDR 72 and 7D modules 73 and 7...

Страница 97: ... the 2I and 2J fiber laser module Figure 3 37 2I AND 2J LASER FIBER MODULE Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye When using a laser Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver 2 channels Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 831827A1 CDR 2I and 2J modules CAUTION NOTICE ...

Страница 98: ... BETWEEN TWO G 703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature can differ from one manufacturer to another Therefore it is not uncommon to see pinouts num bered TxA TxB RxA and RxB In such cases it can be assumed that A is equivalent to and B is equivalent to b G 703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1 With the power to the relay off remove the G 703 module 7R or 7S as follows Record the original location of the module...

Страница 99: ...disabled OFF d G 703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G 703 module internal timing mode and loop timing mode default Internal Timing Mode The system clock is generated internally Therefore the G 703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back to back UR to UR connections For back to back connections set for octet timing S1 OFF and timing mode to internal timing S...

Страница 100: ... Figure 3 41 G 703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester tra...

Страница 101: ...lock input for the two RS422 channels The system functions correctly when the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature Terminal timing is a common fea ture to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source Using the terminal timing feature two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are foll...

Страница 102: ...proper system operation For example the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 46 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS Data module 1 Data module 2 Signal name Signal name SD A Send data TT A Terminal timing TT B Terminal timing SD B Send data RD A Received data RD A Received data SD A Send data SD B Send data RD B Received data RD B Received data R...

Страница 103: ...en using a LASER Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver Figure 3 47 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE data communications equipment units 3 3 7 G 703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G 703 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64...

Страница 104: ...er optic connector type ST Wavelength 820 40 nm Connection as per all fiber optic connections a Tx to Rx connection is required The UR series C37 94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37 94 standard shown as follows The UR series C37 94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface G 703 RS422 or X 21 of a...

Страница 105: ...rd the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing sele...

Страница 106: ...s follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 N...

Страница 107: ... framing and data rate The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows Emulated IEEE standard emulates C37 94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface modules set to n 1 or 64 kbps Fiber optic cable type 9 125 μm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode single mode ELED compatible with HP HFBR...

Страница 108: ...r systems The C37 94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows 1 With power to the relay off remove the C37 94SM module modules 2A or 2B as follows Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in ...

Страница 109: ...follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 NOR...

Страница 110: ... data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each yellow bit Solid red FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid ...

Страница 111: ...tion are required See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Software section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode relay connected to directly communicate with the F60 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sites ...

Страница 112: ...nsion that had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it is added back to the Settings List tree menu Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device order code compatible files or individual menu items Also the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file dr...

Страница 113: ...rm users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components 1 Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view 2 Main window menu bar 3 Main window tool bar 4 Site ...

Страница 114: ...ow to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The settings file is now in template editing mode Alternative...

Страница 115: ...below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 5 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 6 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings The next time that the device settings are accessed only those specified as viewable editable display in the menu hierarchy c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE GE recommends that templates be ...

Страница 116: ...gs with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 3 Right click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 4 Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template Once the template has been applied users are limited to view...

Страница 117: ...ted to edit the settings specified by the template but all settings are shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE Once a settings template is removed it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use 3 Right click the...

Страница 118: ...ries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 If prompted enter the template password 3 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background The icon on the uppe...

Страница 119: ... as shown below and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number Once FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number A serial number is viewable unde...

Страница 120: ...ate time and serial number of the F60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC This infor mation can be compared with the F60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the F60 device or obtained from th...

Страница 121: ...any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a F60 device The F60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the examp...

Страница 122: ... INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceability i...

Страница 123: ...etup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the horizontal arrang...

Страница 124: ...SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is applied all monitored inputs outputs and internal systems are OK and tha...

Страница 125: ...des phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was inv...

Страница 126: ... when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands fo...

Страница 127: ...ght user setting groups revisions 3 0x and higher support six setting groups For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions the relay panel shows eight setting groups Please note that the LEDs despite their default labels are fully user programmable The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2 The LEDs however are not pre programmed To match the pre printed label the ...

Страница 128: ... and press the Print button in the front panel report window 5 When printing is complete fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels 6 Remove the F60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below wit...

Страница 129: ...wards as shown below 2 Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the F60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay ...

Страница 130: ... below This attaches the label tool to the LED label 3 Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below 4 Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the F60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels ...

Страница 131: ...of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Страница 132: ...y of related flash messages These features are provided for two breakers the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker which must be breaker 1 For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1 2 BREAKER FUNCTION setting is Enabled for each breaker b CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING Installations can require that a breaker...

Страница 133: ... 4 2 7 MENUS a NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD This message appears when the USER 1 USER 2 or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND PASSWORD is required ...

Страница 134: ...Actual Values page appears This page contains system and relay status information Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page This page ...

Страница 135: ...he VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They can be upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters FLASH MESSAGE TIME 1 0 s For example select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting MINIMUM 0 5 MAXIMUM ...

Страница 136: ...ey until the SECURITY message appears on the display 3 Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display 4 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message is displayed 5 After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message appears on the display press the VALUE keys change the selection to Programmed 6 Press the ENTER key 7 When the NEW SETTING...

Страница 137: ...e in the same password and press ENTER 9 When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears your new Setting or Command Password will be active f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception A message prompts you to type in the existing password for each security level before a new password can be entered ...

Страница 138: ...4 28 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 4 2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 ...

Страница 139: ...ee page 5 65 FAULT REPORTS See page 5 70 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 72 DATA LOGGER See page 5 74 DEMAND See page 5 76 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 77 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 80 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 81 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 83 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 87 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 88 DIRECT I O See page 5 90 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 9...

Страница 140: ...e page 5 161 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS See page 5 161 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 162 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 167 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 168 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 228 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 230 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 232 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5 238 OVERFREQUENCY See page 5 239 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE See pag...

Страница 141: ...S See page 5 289 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 5 292 REMOTE DEVICES See page 5 292 REMOTE INPUTS See page 5 294 REMOTE DPS INPUTS See page 5 295 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 295 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 296 RESETTING See page 5 296 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5 297 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5 297 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 300 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 302 IEC 61850 GOOSE ...

Страница 142: ...gic diagrams are defined in Appendix F Some settings are specified in per unit pu calculated quantities pu quantity actual quantity base quantity Where the current source is from a single CT the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT Use the secondary current base to convert per unit current settings to from a secondary current value and use the primary cur rent base t...

Страница 143: ...ration of the element When set to Self Reset the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self resets once the operate element condition clears When set to Latched the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay EVENTS setting This setting is used to control whe...

Страница 144: ... user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source This source can be given a specific name through the settings and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for l...

Страница 145: ...ion is based on the physical location of the channels required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT VT module is mounted as the first character followed by numbers indicating the channel either 1 or 5 See the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and current ...

Страница 146: ...sing a recognizable corporate email account Customer service provides a code to reset the relay to the factory defaults 2 Enter the reset code on the front panel under COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE SERVICE COMMAND 3 Change the default password of ChangeMe1 as outlined in the Setting Up CyberSentry and Changing Default Pass word section in the first chapter PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS A user account require...

Страница 147: ...sta UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout The state of the session local or remote setting or command determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when local setting access is disabled ACCESS LOC SETG ON Asserted when local setting access is enabled ACCESS LOC CMND OFF Asserted when local command access is disabled ACCESS LOC C...

Страница 148: ...N PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION The following access supervision settings are available INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three minute time span before lockout occurs When lockout occurs the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On These operands are ...

Страница 149: ...s normal that is a local setting password is required If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand then the operand must be asserted set as on prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access If setting access is not authorized for local operation front panel or RS232 interface and the user attempts to obtain setting access then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is d...

Страница 150: ...ess Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off The state of the Flex Logic operand is continuously monitored for an off to on transition When this occurs remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout...

Страница 151: ... to enter a username and password ADDING A NEW USER The following pre requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system The user adding the account must have administrator rights The EnerVista security management system must be enabled previous section To add user accounts 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management window 2 En...

Страница 152: ...l values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges When any of the Settings Event Recorder and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves th...

Страница 153: ...mer enabled features are open All the other ports are closed For example Modbus is on by default so its TCP port number 502 is open But if Modbus is disabled port 502 is closed This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found open When CyberSentry is enabled Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted which is not always tolerated by SCADA systems The UR has a bypass access f...

Страница 154: ...authentication port 1 65535 1812 Administrator Primary Accounting Port RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 Administrator Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor specific attributes used with the protocol Value that represents General Electric Administrator RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret Shared secret used in authentication It displays as asterisks This setting must meet the Cyber...

Страница 155: ...abled To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes and then the Administrator can re enable device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled Administrator Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware upgrades If Yes and the firmware upgrade attempt is made the device denies the upgrade and displays an error message that the lock is set On each...

Страница 156: ...upervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not approve changes after the fact Only Supervisor can set the Settings and Firmware Lock in the Security Settings This role also has the ability to forcefully logoff any other role and clear the security event log This role can also be disabled but only through a Supervisor authentication When this role is disabled its pe...

Страница 157: ...rvisor approval can change the role associated password In CyberSentry password encryption is not supported Session Settings PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY SESSION SETTINGS The following session settings are available SESSION LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of failed authentications the default is three and the maxi mum is 99 before the device blocks subsequent authentication attem...

Страница 158: ...he Bypass Access feature for such situations which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ethernet Setting it to Remote ensures no authentication is required over Ethernet and Modbus communication is unen crypted Only a Supervisor or Administrator if Supervisor role is disabled can enable this feature Note that other protocols DNP 101 103 104 EGD are not encrypted and they are good communications options ...

Страница 159: ...h the Session Lockout threshold When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded a minor alarm indication comes up Operand is AUTHENTICA TION FAIL FIRMWARE LOCK When Enabled any firmware upgrade attempt brings up a minor self test alarm Operand is UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT SETTINGS LOCK When Enabled an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates a minor self test alarm Operand is UNAU...

Страница 160: ... user names Administra tor Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer in the RADIUS server If you do the UR relay automatically provides the authentication from the device 4 In the EnerVista software choose server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on the RADIUS server for server authentication login 5 After making any required changes log out When changing settings o...

Страница 161: ...ation with origin information username and IP MAC address a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred AUTH_LOCKOUT ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Error 3 An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed authentication attempts FIRMWARE_UPGD ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Warning 4 Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred FIRMWARE_LOCK ORIGIN TIMESTAMP Critical 1 An attempt was made to change firmware w...

Страница 162: ...susceptible to noise Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal The F60 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substi tuted with zero This applies to phase and ground current phasors as...

Страница 163: ...A 13811 2 V 66 4 V 720 5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut off will not be displayed As well the three phase energy data will not accumu late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut off Lower the VOLTAGE CUT OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower sig nals as valid measurements Unless dictated otherwise by a specific app...

Страница 164: ...ovide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON 2 Set the properties for user programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following cha...

Страница 165: ... firmware A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy chained and connected to a DCS PLC or computer using the RS485 ports If IEC 60870 103 is chosen as the protocol valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit s and valid parity is Even COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS See page 5 27 MESSAGE NETWORK See page 5 30 MESSAGE ROUTING See page 5 32 MESSAGE MODBUS PROTOCOL See page 5 35 MESSAGE PROTOCOL DNP 3 0 Range DNP ...

Страница 166: ...0 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 where LAN 1 is 10 1 1 x 255 255 255 0 IP2 Mask2 10 2 1 2 255 255 255 0 where LAN2 is 10 2 1 x 255 255 255 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 255 255 0 where LAN3 is 10 3 1 x 255 255 255 0 Example 2 IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN1 is 10 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 11 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN2 is 11 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 12 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN3 is 12 x x x 255 0 0 0 Exam...

Страница 167: ...ses the IP and MAC address of P2 Figure 5 5 MULTIPLE LANS WITH REDUNDANCY Multiple LANS No Redundancy The following topology provides local configuration monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1 to which port 1 P1 is connected access to the public network on LAN2 to which port 2 P2 is connected and communications with SCADA on LAN3 to which port 3 P3 is connected There is no redundancy Figure...

Страница 168: ...2 REDUNDANCY determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode If a license for PRP was pur chased the options are None Failover and PRP If a license for PRP was not purchased the available options are None and Failover In non redundant mode REDUNDANCY set to None ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC IP and mask addresses If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover the op...

Страница 169: ... does not conflict with another multicast protocol e FAR END FAULT INDICATION FEFI Since 100BASE FX does not support Auto Negotiation a Far End Fault Indication FEFI feature is included in UR 7 that allows for detection of link failures The purpose of the Far End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there is a problem with one of the fibers Wi...

Страница 170: ... to align PRP with the High availability Seamless Redundancy HSR protocol To achieve this the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 ver sion The revised standard IEC 62439 3 2012 is commonly referred to as PRP 1 while the original standard is PRP 0 The UR relays support only PRP 1 The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports specifically Port 2 an...

Страница 171: ...y Static Routes To delete a route 1 Replace the route destination with the default loopback address 127 0 0 1 When deleting a route the mask and gateway must be also brought back to default values 2 Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127 0 0 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED BY STATIC ROUTES The following rules are validated internally The route mas...

Страница 172: ... 1 Port 2 IP address 10 1 2 2 connects the UR to LAN 10 1 2 0 24 and to the EnerVista software through Router 2 Router 2 has an interface on 10 1 2 0 24 and the IP address of this interface is 10 1 2 1 The configuration before release 7 10 was as follows PRT1 IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 2 PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 255 0 PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 1 PRT2 IP ADDRESS 10 1 2 2 PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 255 ...

Страница 173: ...e with protocol specifications for broadcast messages never replies Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur Generally each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1 When using Modbus TCP IP the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field See ...

Страница 174: ...DNP CHANNEL 1 2 PORT SETTINGS RS232 RS485 ETHERNET DNP Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 none Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth UDP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 RS485 Modbus DNP DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Chan...

Страница 175: ...0000 MESSAGE DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP PF SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 100...

Страница 176: ... is set to Network UDP the channel 1 DNP protocol can be used over UDP IP on the Ethernet ports See the DNP appendix for information on the DNP protocol Changes to these settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave add...

Страница 177: ...a These settings group the F60 analog input data into the following types current voltage power energy power factor and other Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type For example to trigger unsolic ited responses from the F60 when any current values change by 15 A the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15 Note that these setting...

Страница 178: ... Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870 5 104 protocol can be configured The value for each point is user programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs MME points The menu for the binary input points DNP or MSP points IEC 60870 5 104 ...

Страница 179: ...tilizing 61850 messaging it can be desirable to route 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications or to use redundant inde pendent ports and a high speed network recovery method such as PRP The F60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS protocol as specified by IEC 61850 MMS is supported over two protocol stacks TCP IP over Ethernet The F60 operates as an IEC 61850 ser...

Страница 180: ...time interval The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE fixed F60 GOOSE and configurable GOOSE The GSSE settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSEE These settings are applicable to GSSE only If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled GSSE messages are not transmitted The GSSE ID setting represe...

Страница 181: ...ious to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the F60 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection ...

Страница 182: ...s 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The F60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the G...

Страница 183: ...e configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5 7 ...

Страница 184: ...must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a...

Страница 185: ...d by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between F60 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE...

Страница 186: ...two data items The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands First the REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 that is the first configurable dataset Then REMOTE IN 1 16 ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance wit...

Страница 187: ...the F60 is restarted Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client server functionality is not required IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality GOOSE GSSE inter device communication and client server communication If the GOOSE GSSE functionalit...

Страница 188: ... values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con straint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db value shall repre ...

Страница 189: ... control the F60 virtual inputs The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4 When this value is changed the F60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re instantiated and contain the...

Страница 190: ...t all values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points associated ti...

Страница 191: ... value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the F60 Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the F60 is restarted It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some but not all data from already existing GGIO1 GGIO4 and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset REPORT 1 DATASET ITEMS...

Страница 192: ...n result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS Off ...

Страница 193: ...e details on these control models The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value To be successful the IEC 61850 operate com mand must be executed after the select command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP C...

Страница 194: ... UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols n TFTP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP can be used to transfer files from the F60 over a network The F60 operates as a TFTP server TFTP client software is available from various sources including Microsoft Windows NT The dir txt file obtained from th...

Страница 195: ...threshold values from the default for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point Whenever power is removed and re applied to the F60 the default thresholds are in effect The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not If redundancy is set to Yes two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time IEC TCP PORT NUMBER When set to 0 the change takes eff...

Страница 196: ... used for the real time transfer of data for display and control purposes The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges and other devices can be configured to consume EGD data exchanges The number of produced exchanges up to three the data items in each exchange up to 50 and the exchange production rate can be configured EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR series relays The ...

Страница 197: ...D exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to 1000 ms FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION EXCH 1 FUNCTION Disable Range Disable Enable MESSAGE EXCH 1 DESTINATION 0 0 0 0 Range standard IP address MESSAGE EXCH 1 DATA RATE 1000 ms Range 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Modbus register address range...

Страница 198: ... IEC 60870 5 103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL set ting is set to IEC 60870 5 103 IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU This setting uniquely defines this F60 on the serial line Select an ID between 0 and 254 This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller but it is recom mended Note that RS485 only allows a ...

Страница 199: ...e to a general interrogation received from the controller or reported spontaneously Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests If the F60 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time it demands access for Class 1 data transmission ACD 1 in the con trol field of the response For any change to take effect restart the relay PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC60...

Страница 200: ...GE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 FACTOR 1 000 Range 0 000 to 65 535 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 OFFSET 0 Range 32768 to 32767 in steps of 1 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP 9 Range 3 or 9 MESSAGE ASDU 4 FUN 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 INF 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT 0 Range 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 ANALOG 1 Off Range FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE ASDU ...

Страница 201: ...n configure only one measurand for each ASDU but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU2 and configure measurands in ASDU3 For any change to take effect restart the relay ANALOG FACTOR AND OFFSET For each measurand included in the ASDU a factor and offset can also be configured The factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands The final measurement sent to the IEC60870 103 mas te...

Страница 202: ...ble The ON and OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type FUN and information number INF If the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command the relay rejects it IEC103 COMMANDS COMMAND 0 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 1 Range see sub me...

Страница 203: ...eate timestamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data such as event records and oscillography When the relay restarts the RTC initializes from an onboard battery backed clock which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch approximately 1 minute per month 23 ppm Once the RTC is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol PTP IRIG B or SNTP its accuracy approaches that of...

Страница 204: ...ations protocols Whenever a time synchronization message is received through any of the active protocols the UR clock updates However given that IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 60870 5 104 Modbus and DNP are low accuracy time synchronization methods avoid their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols such as IRIG B and PTP are active in the system See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu se...

Страница 205: ...grandmaster role Should a clock on starting up discover it is better that the present grandmaster it assumes the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave The F60 qualification mechanism accepts a potential mas ter clock as a new grandmaster when in a four second interval it has received three announce messages from it all better than the present grandmaster clock and better t...

Страница 206: ...relay s real time clock This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the network In a fully compliant PP network the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay In such networks this setting should be zero In networks containing one or more switches and or clocks that do not impl...

Страница 207: ...ON to Enabled The F60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet The F60 waits up to 18 minutes 1024 seconds without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self test error The SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is 123 for normal SNTP operation If SNTP is not required close the port by setting it to 0 When the SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is set to 0 the cha...

Страница 208: ...culate local time The DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME DST settings can be used to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone Note that when IRIG B time synchronization is active the local time in the IRIG B signal contains any daylight savings time offset and so the DST settings are ignored 5 2 7 FAULT REPORTS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FAULT REPORTS FAULT REPORT 1 The F60 relay support...

Страница 209: ...ot triggered again Considering the reset time of protection elements there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner As the fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post fault data it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms Each fault report is stored as a file the relay capacity is fifteen 15 files An sixteenth 16th trigger overwrites the oldes...

Страница 210: ...cycles captured per record See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record The following table provides sam ple configurations with corresponding cycles record The minimum number of oscillographic records is three A new record can automatically overwrite an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a p...

Страница 211: ...ndent on The type of relay The type and number of CT VT hardware modules installed and The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed Upon startup the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A FlexAnalog parameters The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expe...

Страница 212: ...olatile memory meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost For a fixed sampling rate the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use Exam ple storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the ...

Страница 213: ...s set to Trigger DATA LOGGER RATE This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 16 This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1 16 of the data log The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on the type of relay the type and number of CT VT hardware modules installed and the type and numbe...

Страница 214: ...tic of 15 minutes is illustrated below A setpoint establishes the time to reach 90 of a steady state value just as the response time of an analog instrument A steady state value applied for twice the response time will indicate 99 of the value Figure 5 9 THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC CALCULATION METHOD 2 BLOCK INTERVAL This method calculates a linear average of the quantity RMS current real power ...

Страница 215: ...nabled the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user programmable condition such as user program mable pushbutton The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting The test covers all LEDs including the LEDs of the optional user programmable pushbuttons The test consists of three stages 1 All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated This is a quick test to verify if a...

Страница 216: ...rned through user programmable pushbutton 1 The following set tings should be applied Configure user programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s Configure the LED test to recognize user programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following ent...

Страница 217: ... Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi nate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state For the standard faceplate the LEDs are located as follows LED Panel 2 user programmable LEDs 1 through 24 LED Panel 3 user programmable LEDs 25 through 48 For the enhanced faceplate the LEDs are located as follows LED column 2 user programmable LEDs 1 through 12 LED column 3 user...

Страница 218: ...NC 2 SYNC OP LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off LED 8 operand Off LED 20 operand Off LED 9 operand BREAKER 1 OPEN LED 21 operand AR ENABLED LED 10 operand BREAKER 1 CLOSED LED 22 operand AR DISABLED LED 11 operand BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED 23 operand AR RIP LED 12 operand Off LED 24 operand AR LO USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION Enabled Range Disabled Enabled Valid for units e...

Страница 219: ... the following figures Figure 5 11 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ENHANCED FACEPLATE An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the F60 is ordered with the 12 user pro grammable pushbutton option Figure 5 12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS STANDARD FACEPLATE Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password However by ...

Страница 220: ...eaker control feature is not configured for manual control via the USER 1 through 3 pushbuttons as shown below If configured for manual control breaker control typically uses the larger optional user programmable pushbuttons making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications Figure 5 13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC 842010A2 CDR CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREA...

Страница 221: ...ely update the EnerVista software under Maintenance Enable Pushbutton USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Self Reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT USER PB 1 Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 HOLD 0 0 s Range 0 0 to...

Страница 222: ... set activated by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSH BTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton The state of each pushbutton is stored in non volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power The pushbutton is reset deactivated in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set ting or by directly pressing the asso...

Страница 223: ...e bottom 20 character line of the user programmable pushbutton message and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched A message does not display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSA...

Страница 224: ...tton is activated While activated target and other messages are suppressed To allow front panel keypad operation when a keypad button is pressed the message is supressed for 10 seconds PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS If this setting is enabled each user programmable pushbutton state change is logged as an event into the event recorder The figures show the user programmable pushbutton logic Figure 5 16 USER PR...

Страница 225: ...ny FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING FLASH MESSAGE TIME TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SETTING TRST 0 Instantaneous reset OFF MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN ID TEXT XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN OFF TEXT The message is temporarily removed...

Страница 226: ...splay note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys The display disappears after the default message time out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPER TIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting USER PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT The user definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting Any FlexLogic operand in particul...

Страница 227: ...hrough the characters A space is selected like a character 4 Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position 5 Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed 6 The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information 7 Press the ENTER key to store the new settings To enter a numerical value for any of the five items the dec...

Страница 228: ... decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 This item is not being used There is no corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 This item is not being used There is no corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 5 0 This item is not being used There is no corresponding ti...

Страница 229: ...lexLogic operands 1 DIRECT RING BREAK direct input output ring break This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR series relay are not being received back by the relay 2 DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF direct device offline These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output messages from at least one direct device are not being received Direct input and...

Страница 230: ...OUTPUT DATA RATES MODULE CHANNEL SUPPORTED DATA RATES 74 Channel 1 64 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 7L Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7M Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7P Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7T Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps 7W Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7V Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 1...

Страница 231: ...1 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps For UR series IED 2 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps The message delivery time is about 0 2 of power cycle in both ways at 128 kbps that is from device 1 to device 2 and from device 2 to device 1 Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back ...

Страница 232: ... rings are healthy IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 4 0 4 of power system cycle IED 3 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken say TX2 RX2 the delivery times are as follows IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of powe...

Страница 233: ...OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes For UR series IED 3 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 3 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes In this configuration the following delivery times are expected at 128 kbps IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 5 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of pow...

Страница 234: ...H1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O CRC ALARM CH1 2 The F60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32 bit CRC The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check The monitoring function counts all incoming messages including messages that failed the CRC check A separate c...

Страница 235: ...ming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10 4 c UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 The F60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages In the ring configuration all messages originating at...

Страница 236: ...F TERMINALS is 3 three terminal system set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2 For a two terminal system the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 redundant channels LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER In installa tions that use multiplexers or modems it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays The...

Страница 237: ...y until RELAY SETTINGS is set to Programmed This setting is defaulted to Not Programmed when at the factory The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the Programmed state The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay This name will appear on generated reports INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed Range Not Programmed Program...

Страница 238: ...consists of the following steps Configure the field units This establishes the point to point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module and a specific digital core on a specific Brick This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay Configure the AC banks This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages AC bank confi...

Страница 239: ... primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input can be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating must match the settin...

Страница 240: ...0 volt VT in a delta connec tion the secondary voltage would be 115 that is 13800 14400 120 For a wye connection the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 66 4 On a 14 4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400 120 the voltage value entered would be 120 that is 14400 120 If the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION is set to Delt...

Страница 241: ...nal is not measurable at a given time the phase angles are not referenced The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop which can synchronize independent UR series relays if they have the same AC signal reference This results in very precise correlation of phase angle indications between different UR series relays FREQUENCY TRACKING is set to Disabled only in unusual circumstances co...

Страница 242: ...e of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude such as phase time overcurrent two settings are provided One setting specifies the source the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS AC input actual values The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs ...

Страница 243: ...ding connected into a breaker and a half sys tem The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application and the CT VT inputs that are used to provide the data 827092A3 CDR SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CUR...

Страница 244: ...USE OF SOURCES Y LV D HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT None None U1 827794A1 CDR F 5 F 1 DSP Bank U 1 M 1 M 1 M 5 51BF 1 51BF 2 Source 4 87T 51P UR Relay A V V A W W Var Var Amps Source 1 Source 3 Volts Amps Amps Volts Amps Source 2 ...

Страница 245: ...Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 070 s...

Страница 246: ...d used to track the breaker open or closed position If the mode is selected as 1 Pole the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the breake...

Страница 247: ...TING Enabled BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL USER 2 OFF ON To close BRK1 Name SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C To breaker control logic sheet 2...

Страница 248: ...D BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN BREAKER 1 INTERM ΦA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole BREAKER 1 MODE SETTING Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM SETTING Off BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND OR OR SETTING BREA...

Страница 249: ...nd disables the operation of the disconnect switch element SWITCH 1 NAME Assign a user defined name up to six characters to the disconnect switch This name will be used in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAGE S...

Страница 250: ...k phases B and C respectively SWTCH 1 ΦA 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that is for a normally closed 89 b status input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If th...

Страница 251: ...H 1 ΦB INTERM FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SWITCH 1 Φ BAD ST C SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM 859713A1 CDR SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY 0 SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN SETTING Off SWITCH 1 OPEN SETTING Disabled Enabled SWITCH 1 FUNCTION AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD OR OR AND AND SW...

Страница 252: ... to 0 98 and 1 03 to 20 00 This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points To enter a custom FlexCurve enter the reset and operate times using the VALUE keys for each selected pickup point using the MESSAGE UP DOWN keys for the desired protection curve A B C or D FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table 5 1...

Страница 253: ...h a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples There are 41 recloser curve types supported These definite oper ating times are useful to coordinate operating times typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize F...

Страница 254: ...s see below Figure 5 31 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 32 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software gener...

Страница 255: ...R CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Страница 256: ...ND GE201 Figure 5 36 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Страница 257: ...GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Страница 258: ...Figure 5 40 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Страница 259: ...locations within the power system are networked to a central location The F60 offers PMU features over two communication standards IEC 61850 9 5 and IEEE C37 118 The figure shows complete Synchrophasor implementation Figure 5 41 COMPLETE SYNCHROPHASOR IMPLEMENTATION UR Implementation of IEC 61850 90 5 Synchrophasor data as measured and calculated by phasor measurement units PMUs is used to assess ...

Страница 260: ...ber of PMUs and aggregators vary by product as outlined in the table The figure shows an example of an N60 using four Logical Device PMUs Logical Device 2 through 5 and four aggrega tors The control blocks for the aggregators are located in LD1 A 64 char LDName setting is provided Figure 5 42 N60 EXAMPLE FOR FOUR LOGICAL DEVICE PMUS Precise time input to the relay from the international time stand...

Страница 261: ...egator inherits the Sample Rate SmpRate and IEEE C37 118 Class P or M of that PMU The value of the SmpRate DO in the Report Control Block is set based on the value of the Sample Rate in the PMU The Class of the Dataset are mapped into the MSVID of the Dataset see text below for the overall name of the MSVID If other PMUs are mapped into the same aggregator with different Sample Rates or from diffe...

Страница 262: ...of each PMU data set for version 7 2 and later using FCDA data non structured data EXAMPLE PROTECTION SYNCHROPHASORS DATA SET WITH REPORTING RATE 60 FRAMES SECOND This example gives the protection synchrophasors data set with a reporting rate of 60 frames per second P60MMXU1 See the figure earlier Logical Nodes Supported in Each Logical Device This data or list of items as shown in the following f...

Страница 263: ...IEC 61850 90 5 The F60 is expected to send the CFG 2 file IEEE C37 118 config file upon request from the upstream synchrophasor devices for example P30 without stopping R SV multicasting as shown in the figure below The primary domain control ler PDC does not need to use a stop start data stream command if the UR protocol is set to IEC 61850 90 5 prior to requesting the configuration via CFG 2 IEE...

Страница 264: ...aggregator is set to 90 5 the version number of the CFG 2 file found in bits 0 3 of the frame SYNC word which should presently be set to 2 is set as follows The PMU settings are organized in logical groups as follows For correct PMU operation upgrade the firmware to the latest v7 2x release consult the v7 2x Release Notes for information PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR ME...

Страница 265: ... STYLE Polar Range Polar Rectangular MESSAGE PMU 1 RATE 10 sec Range 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 5 sec 10 sec 12 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 50 sec 60 sec 100 sec 120 sec MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 Off Range Available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 1 Range 16 character ASCII string MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 NAME GE UR PMU PHS...

Страница 266: ...ut or recorded When one source is selected by one PMU it cannot be selected by another PMU PMU 1 CLASS Range P M None This setting selects the synchrophasor class Note that a reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be selected for class P synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz respectively PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16 b...

Страница 267: ...urrently with the synchrophasor instant These values are mapped into a two byte integer number with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16 PMU1 D CH 1 NM to PMU1 D CH 16 NM These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels Sixteen character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame PMU1 D CH...

Страница 268: ...pectively as specified in the IEC 61850 standard IEC 61850 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT BASIC CONFIGURATION PMU1 PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURA TION 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION PMU1 LDINST A user defined visible string maximum 64 char ASCII test to assign Logical Device LD Inst for a PMU LD As per IEC 61850 6 standard specification the PMU LD Name is the concatenated ...

Страница 269: ...eps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION MAG 100 0 Range 95 0 to 105 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION ANGLE 0 00 Range 5 00 to 5 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU...

Страница 270: ...rol purposes without applying this correction 4 When connected to line to line voltages the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE This setting allows correcting positive and negative sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers ...

Страница 271: ...s to be implemented using FlexLogic e USER TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles f FREQUENCY TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENCY T...

Страница 272: ...s long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 48 FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC g VOLTAGE TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW VOLT 0 800 pu Range 0 250 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH VO...

Страница 273: ...sing the recorder in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 49 VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC h CURRENT TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER This element responds to elevated current The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit PMU source All current channel A B ...

Страница 274: ... pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current or the product of nominal secondary voltage the VT ratio and the nominal primary current For the three phase power 1 pu is three times that for a single phase power The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 p...

Страница 275: ...R PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 0...

Страница 276: ...ositive df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the fall ing direction negative df dt The comparator applies a 4 hysteresis PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting can be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIM...

Страница 277: ...COF df dt SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL df dt RAISE OR df dt FALL RUN SETTINGS PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER DPO TIME 0 t DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER Off 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame 847012A1 CDR AND OR SE...

Страница 278: ...unt of pre trigger data as a percent of the entire record This setting applies only to the timed mode of recording l AGGREGATOR PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU AGGREGATOR 1 When the protocol selection is set via the software or keypad all aggregators whose protocol is not set to None are set to the last protocol saved that is IEEE C37 118 or IEC 61850 90 5 to any aggregators...

Страница 279: ... PDC CONTROL The synchrophasor standard allows for user defined controls originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands Each aggregator supports 16 FlexLogic operands as shown in the table The operands are asserted for 5 seconds follow...

Страница 280: ...data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 2 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network as above AGTR2 PDC CNTRL 3 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as received via the network as above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network Table 5 16 NUMBER OF ASD...

Страница 281: ...ation revision every time the configuration is changed This setting allows the user to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295 MSVCB 1 PRIORITY A value from 0 through 7 The default value is 4 MSVCB 1 IP Class The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services formerly called TypeOfService value The default value is set for Expedited Forwarding 101110B 46 or 2EH This va...

Страница 282: ...5 144 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 5 4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 1 yes no 2 yes yes ENUMERATION AUTHENTICATION ENCRYPTION ...

Страница 283: ...plies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators If more complex logic than presented above is required it is implemented via FlexLogic For example if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element the two contro...

Страница 284: ... Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Contact Closed Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1 V...

Страница 285: ...2 exceeded the user specified level ring configurations only ELEMENT Autoreclose per CT bank AR1 ENABLED AR1 RIP AR1 LO AR1 BLK FROM MAN CLS AR1 CLOSE AR1 SHOT CNT 0 AR1 SHOT CNT 1 AR1 SHOT CNT 2 AR1 SHOT CNT 3 AR1 SHOT CNT 4 AR1 DISABLED Autoreclose 1 is enabled Autoreclose 1 is in progress Autoreclose 1 is locked out Autoreclose 1 is temporarily disabled Autoreclose 1 close command is issued Aut...

Страница 286: ...between the 52 a and 52 b contacts Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Breaker 1 phase C is closed Breaker 1 phase C is open Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole Breaker 1 is closed Breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 has discrepancy Breaker 1 trouble alarm Breaker 1 manual close Breaker 1 trip phase A command Breaker 1 trip phase B command Bre...

Страница 287: ...element has operated The high impedance fault arcing suspected phase A element has operated The high impedance fault arcing suspected phase B element has operated The high impedance fault arcing suspected phase C element has operated The high impedance fault arcing suspected neutral element has operated The high impedance instantaneous overcurrent A element has operated The high impedance instanta...

Страница 288: ...s control bit 1 as received via the network Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network ELEMENT Phase directional overcurrent PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK Phase A directional 1 block Phase B directional 1 block Phase C directional 1 block Phase directional 1 block PH ...

Страница 289: ...it 1 has operated Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered no events or targets are generated by this operand ELEMENT Synchrophasor one shot PMU ONE SHOT EXPIRED PMU ONE SHOT OP PMU ONE SHOT PENDING Indicates the one shot operation has been executed and the pr...

Страница 290: ...ch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole SWITCH 2 to 16 Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1 ELEMENT Synchrocheck SYNC1 DEAD S OP SYNC1 DEAD S DPO SYNC1 SYNC OP SYNC1 SYNC DPO SYNC1 CLS OP SYNC1 CLS DPO SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1 d...

Страница 291: ...n the bad state Asserted while the remote double point status input is in the intermediate state Asserted while the remote double point status input is off Asserted while the remote double point status input is on REMDPS Ip 2 to 5 Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 INPUTS OUTPUTS Remote inputs REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 2 On REMOTE INPUT 3 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set logic 1 Flag is se...

Страница 292: ...nd SELF DIAGNOSTICS See Relay Self tests descriptions in Chapter 7 Commands and Targets ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF TESTS BATTERY FAIL CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK EQUIPMENT MISMATCH FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR MAINTENANCE ALERT FIRST ETHERNET FAIL PROCESS BUS FAILURE PTP FAILURE REMOTE DEVICE OFF RRTD COMM FAIL SECOND ETHERNET FAI...

Страница 293: ...t generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is a maximum of 64 one shots NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a negative going edge DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges Logic gate NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter OR 2 ...

Страница 294: ... 96 can only be properly assigned once Figure 5 55 EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME 1 Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators If this is not possible the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied Once this is done count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits whic...

Страница 295: ...r at a time until the required logic is complete It is generally easier to start at the out put end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustomed...

Страница 296: ...e for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On 95 The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate the operated state of digital element 2 This operand is DIG ELEM 2 OP Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3 95 DIG ELEM 2 OP 96 Cont Ip H1c On 97 NOT 98 AND 2 99 Virt ...

Страница 297: ... lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP 88 The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On 87 The input just below the upper input to OR 1 is operand Virt Op 2 On 86 The upper input to OR 1 is operand Virt Op 1 On 85 The last parameter is used to set the latch and is operand Virt Op 4 On The equation for virtual output 4 is 85 Virt Op 4 On 86 Virt Op 1 On 87 Virt Op 2 On 88 Virt Ip 1 ...

Страница 298: ... 1 as arranged in the order shown below DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND 2 Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR 2 Virt Op 3 On OR 4 LATCH S R Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR 3 TIMER 2 Virt Op 4 END In the expression above the virtual output 4 input to the four input OR is listed before it is created This is typical of a form of feedback in thi...

Страница 299: ... never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 5 6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 32 There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations TIMER 1 TYPE This setting is used to select the time measuring un...

Страница 300: ...ed Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level Delta MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION Over Range Over Under M...

Страница 301: ...setting is set to Absolute Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if t...

Страница 302: ...on with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac teristics as shown in the figure below FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR ...

Страница 303: ... the relay The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per unit values using the following definitions of the base units Table 5 21 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS Brk X Acc Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 1 kA2 cycle DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN ...

Страница 304: ...es the pickup delay of the element The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE 360 degrees see the UR angle referencing convention POWER FACTOR PFBASE 1 00 RTDs BASE 100 C SENSITIVE DIR POWER Sns Dir Power PBASE maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element s SOURCE CU...

Страница 305: ...d the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 65 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched ...

Страница 306: ... also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements section for additional details If the device incorrectly switches to group 1 after...

Страница 307: ...ral distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Ω Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in steps of 1 ME...

Страница 308: ...e element as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the pos...

Страница 309: ... the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98 of the pickup value the variable must be reduced Two methods of this resetting operation are available Instantaneous and Timed The Instan taneous selection is intended for applications with other...

Страница 310: ...5 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 689 2 0 32 358 14 055 5 885 3 597 2 616 2 103 1 799 1 605 1 472 1 378 4 0 64 716 28 111 11 769 7 193 5 232 4...

Страница 311: ... 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 400 3...

Страница 312: ...88 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1 81...

Страница 313: ...table from instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 14 EQ 5 15 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The F60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves See the FlexCurve section in this chapter for detai...

Страница 314: ... a voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION ...

Страница 315: ...LOCK C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Multipl...

Страница 316: ...s of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disab...

Страница 317: ...t elements via the BLOCK inputs of these elements Figure 5 72 PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 ECA 30 Range 0 to 359 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD 0 700 pu Range 0 ...

Страница 318: ...ck or trip on overcurrent as follows When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires In all cases directional...

Страница 319: ... 5 6 5 NEUTRAL CURRENT a MAIN MENU PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1 See page 5 182 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC2 See page 5 182 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC3 See page 5 182 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC4 See page 5 182 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC1 See page 5 183 NOTE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SET...

Страница 320: ...IOC8 See page 5 183 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 See page 5 184 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC2 See page 5 184 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEUTRAL T...

Страница 321: ... small portion 6 25 of the positive sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows EQ 5 16 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero sequence currents resulting from NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEU...

Страница 322: ... 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING Voltage Range Voltage Current Dual Dual V Dual I MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT Calculated V0 Range Calculated V0 Aux Voltage VX MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR Calculated 3I0 Range Calculated 3I0 Measured IG MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS SEQ RESTRAINT 0 063 Range 0 000 to 0 500 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET 0 00 Ω Range 0 00 to 250 00 Ω in ...

Страница 323: ... currents are injected into the relay single phase injection Iop 1 K Iinjected three phase pure zero sequence injection Iop 3 Iinjected The positive sequence restraint is removed for low currents If the positive sequence current is below 0 8 pu the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero This facilitates better response to high resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and...

Страница 324: ...wer system cycle the prospective forward indication is delayed by 1 5 of a power system cycle The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device Larger operating and polarizing signals results in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation The forward looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse looking func...

Страница 325: ...t uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current The ground current must be greater than 0 05 pu to be vali dated as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is not valid neither forward nor reverse indication is given I...

Страница 326: ...OC1 POS SEQ RESTRAINT This setting controls the amount of the positive sequence restraint Set to 0 063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3 40 and older Set to zero to remove the restraint Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection The primary appli cation for th...

Страница 327: ...AL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Measured VX Voltage Calculated V_0 Current Ground Crt IG Zero Seq Crt I_0 Dual Dual V Dual I NOTE 1 CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2 GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3 POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS N...

Страница 328: ...n is made the auxiliary channel must be identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings This element operates when the auxil iary voltage is configured as neutral WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLT Calculated VN Range ...

Страница 329: ... equations A value of 1 pu represents the product of a 1 pu voltage as specified in the overvolt age condition for this element and a 1 pu current as specified in the overcurrent condition for this element WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element The operating power is calculated as EQ 5 19 where indicates complex conjugate By varying the element charac...

Страница 330: ...LTIPLIER This setting is applicable if WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURVE above is selected to Inverse and defines the multiplier factor for the inverse time delay FORWARD FAULT REVERSE FAULT Vn In ECA 180 to 270 Vn In ECA 0 to 90 Vn In ECA 180 Vn In ECA 0 Vn In ECA 90 to 180 Vn In ECA 270 to 360 INDUCTIVE NETWORK RESISTIVE NETWORK CAPACITIIVE NETWORK 837804A1 CDR ...

Страница 331: ...TRIC GND FLT 1 VOLTAGE Calculated Measured SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA S V conj I exp j ECA SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PICKUP WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OV PICKUP S OP PWR PICKUP I OC PICKUP MAG WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PICKUP V OV PICKUP MAG t PKP 0 SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 1 PWR PKP DEL SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 REF PWR RUN WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 MULTIPLIER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND WATTMETRI...

Страница 332: ...ROUND CURRENT For information on the Ground Time Overcurrent curves see Inverse Time Overcurrent Characteristics on page 5 171 GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1 See page 5 195 MESSAGE GROUND TOC2 MESSAGE GROUND TOC4 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 See page 5 196 MESSAGE GROUND IOC2 MESSAGE GROUND IOC8 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 See page 5 197 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 6 ...

Страница 333: ...will be cleared immediately These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disable...

Страница 334: ...sion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY...

Страница 335: ...slope threshold of the main differential element and the fault could go undetected Application of the restricted ground fault pro tection extends the coverage towards the neutral point see the RGF and Percent Differential Zones of Protection diagram RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 RESTD GND FT1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESS...

Страница 336: ...esent If one or more of the phase CTs saturate a spurious neutral current is seen by the relay This is similar to a single infeed situation and may be mistaken for an internal fault Similar difficulties occur in a breaker and a half application of the restricted ground fault where any through fault with a weak infeed from the winding itself may cause problems The UR uses a novel definition of the ...

Страница 337: ...used to ensure better sensitivity when ener gizing a faulty winding The positive sequence component of the restraining signal IR1 is meant to provide restraint during symmetrical condi tions either symmetrical faults or load and is calculated according to the following algorithm 1 If of phase CT then 2 If then 3 else 4 else Under load level currents below 150 of nominal the positive sequence restr...

Страница 338: ...lates the following values Igd 0 and Igr 10 pu EXAMPLE 4 INTERNAL LOW CURRENT SINGLE LINE TO GROUND FAULT UNDER FULL LOAD Given the following inputs IA 1 10 pu 0 IB 1 0 pu 120 IC 1 0 pu 120 and IG 0 05 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values I_0 0 033 pu 0 I_2 0 033 pu 0 and I_1 1 033 pu 0 Igd abs 3 0 0333 0 05 0 15 pu IR0 abs 3 0 033 0 05 0 05 pu IR2 3 0 033 0 10 pu IR1 1 033 8 0 1292 pu a...

Страница 339: ...WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following inputs IA 10 pu 0 IB 0 pu IC 0 pu and IG 0 pu The relay calculates the following values I_0 3 3 pu 0 I_2 3 3 pu 0 and I_1 3 3 pu 0 Igd abs 3 3 3 0 0 10 pu IR0 abs 3 3 3 0 0 10 pu IR2 3 3 3 10 pu IR1 3 3 33 3 33 0 pu and Igr 10 pu The differential current is 100 of the restraining current 5 6 8 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT a MAIN MENU PATH SETTINGS GROU...

Страница 340: ... is cleared immediately Figure 5 85 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE IEEE Mod Inv Range see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIP...

Страница 341: ...ase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase injection opposite rotation Figure 5 86 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled ME...

Страница 342: ...rating quantity EQ 5 28 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative sequence and zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs Fault inception and switch off transients NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE N...

Страница 343: ...ce for which magnitude is the OFFSET setting and angle is the FWD ECA The negative sequence voltage must be greater than 0 02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal Additionally when offset impedance is applied and negative sequence current is above 0 2 pu compensated negative sequence volt age V_2 Z_offset x I_2 has to be above 0 02 pu in order to discriminate fault direction otherwise...

Страница 344: ... how to calculate this setting In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small If this is the intent the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative sequence impedance of the protected circuit Practically it is several times smaller The offset impedance is entered in secondary ohms See the Th...

Страница 345: ...n this pickup threshold applies to zero or negative sequence current When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive sequence restraint technique Figure 5 88 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC 827091A7 CDR AND AND AND AND AND OR OR NOTE V_2 is negative sequence voltage I_2 is negative sequence current I_0 is zero sequence current AND SETTING Off 0 Bl...

Страница 346: ... SUPV PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 1 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 2 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 3 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range...

Страница 347: ... a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it which may be the case for trans former faults For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting a current supervised initiate sh...

Страница 348: ...nserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion The high set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2 along with a timer that will enable the low set detector after its delay interval The delay interval between high set and low set is the expected breaker opening time Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small m...

Страница 349: ...or three pole tripping schemes BF1 USE TIMER 1 If set to Yes the early path is operational BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status 1 to open from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2 If set to Yes the main path is operational BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY Timer 2 is...

Страница 350: ...imately 90 of the resistor current This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed in This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker to ...

Страница 351: ...ING Off 0 Use Seal In SETTING Yes 1 Use Amp Supervision SETTING Yes 1 Phase C Initiate SETTING Off 0 SETTING RUN IC Pickup RUN IA Pickup RUN IB Pickup Initiated phase A to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Initiated to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 Phase Current Supervision Pickup Source SETTING IA IB IC SETTING Initiated phase B to breaker...

Страница 352: ... failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 2 Pickup Delay SETTING AND Use Timer 3 SETTINGS Yes 1 Breaker Pos 2 Phase A 3P Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase B Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase C Off 0 Breaker Test On Off 0 AND Initiated from single pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 3 Pickup Delay SETTING AND AND OR AND OR OR SETTING Phase Current HiSet Pickup RUN IA 0 LoSet Time Delay SETTING SETTING Phase Current Hi...

Страница 353: ...SHEET 2 OF 2 Initiated TO SHEET 2 OF 2 827068 cdr BF1 FUNCTION Disable 0 Enable 1 SETTING BF1 BLOCK Off 0 SETTING BF1 INITIATE Off 0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL IN YES 1 NO 0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV YES 1 NO 0 SETTING IA IB IN IC BF1 SOURCE SETTING IA PICKUP RUN BF1 PH AMP SUPV SETTINGS PICKUP BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP RUN RUN RUN IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Страница 354: ...UP SETTING AND SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING AND SETTING NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 1 SETTING BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 3 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 A 3P Φ Off 0 SETTING BF1 BREAKER TEST ON Off 0 SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING SETTINGS IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 SETTING RUN RUN IA PICKUP RUN BF1 N AMP LOSE...

Страница 355: ...lls below the specified voltage setting The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements Source Transfer Schemes In the event of an undervoltage a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 See page 5 219 MESSAGE...

Страница 356: ... seconds in steps of 0 01 The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char acteristic The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below EQ 5 29 where T operating time D undervoltage delay setting D 0 00 operates instantaneously V secondary voltage applied to the relay Vpickup pickup level Figure 5 95 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES At 0 of ...

Страница 357: ...nd Phase to Phase MESSAGE PHASE UV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 CURVE Definite Time Range Definite Time Inverse Time MESSAGE PHASE UV1 DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE 0 100 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE UV1 TARGET Se...

Страница 358: ...AL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic Operand MESSAGE PHASE OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled M...

Страница 359: ...is element must be configured for a phase VT VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element This function requires the VTs to be wye connected Figure 5 98 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Ran...

Страница 360: ...EQ OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 RESET DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self res...

Страница 361: ...istics The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element The element resets instantaneously The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked Figure 5 100 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOU...

Страница 362: ...r delta VT connection Figure 5 101 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 60...

Страница 363: ...eactive powers as measured per the UR series metering convention θ is a sum of the element characteristic DIR POWER 1 RCA and calibration DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION angles and SMIN is the minimum operating power The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 2 actual value The element has two independent as to the pickup and delay settings stages for a...

Страница 364: ...d in the figure below For example section a in the figure below shows settings for reverse power while section b shows settings for low forward power applications Figure 5 103 DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS RESTRAIN SMIN RCA CALIBRATION OPERATE D i r e c t i o n Q P 842702A1 CDR P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA 0o SMIN 0 d P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA 180o SMIN 0 a P Q OPERATE RESTRAIN RCA 0o S...

Страница 365: ...mply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line the negative values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line Refer to the Directional power sample applications figure for details Together with the RCA this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics This setting applies to three phase power and is entered in per unit pu values The base quantity is 3 x V...

Страница 366: ...cific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE TRIP...

Страница 367: ...ay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is...

Страница 368: ...operand MESSAGE GROUP 1 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 2 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 6 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SETTING GROUP EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled SETTINGS Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 OR SETTINGS Enabled TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Off TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND AND Lat...

Страница 369: ... when the FlexLogic parameter is set to On This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions such as the breaker being open The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which when set makes the partic ular setting group active for use by any grouped element A priority scheme ensures that only one group i...

Страница 370: ...e Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE Time out Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE Restore...

Страница 371: ...wise the change will not take place and an alarm will be set SELECTOR 1 STEP UP This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal The position changes incrementally wrapping up from the last SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE to the first position 1 Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every...

Страница 372: ...SELECTOR TIME OUT setting after the last activity of the three bit control inputs Note that the stepping up control input and three bit control input have independent acknowledging signals SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK accordingly SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay When set to Restore the last position of the selector stored in th...

Страница 373: ...se diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 108 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Страница 374: ...t should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make the fo...

Страница 375: ...wing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 110 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR 1 ...

Страница 376: ... parameter below the minimum voltage current setting The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre quency element to operate This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pi...

Страница 377: ...ip The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding restoration The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup Figure 5 112 OVERF...

Страница 378: ...sequence voltage Overvoltage supervision should be used to pre vent operation under specific system conditions such as faults FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element The supervising function responds to the positive sequence current Typical application includes load shedding Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent super...

Страница 379: ...t only if the frequency is already below certain level such as for load shedding this setting should be set to the required frequency level If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT then the minimum voltage supervision is 3 V Figure 5 113 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC NOTE V_1 PICKUP FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK Off RUN FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE Pos se...

Страница 380: ...he frequency difference ΔF This time can be calculated by EQ 5 31 where ΔΦ phase angle difference in degrees ΔF frequency difference in Hz SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE SRC 2 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 MAX VOL...

Страница 381: ...the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages V1 or and V2 are below the maximum voltage threshold A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level Six options are available None Dead Source function is disabled LV1 and DV2 Live V1 and Dead V2 DV1 and LV2 Dead V1 and Li...

Страница 382: ...ith both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxil iary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the con figuration of inp...

Страница 383: ...SETTINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AD CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPERAND...

Страница 384: ...NL RST FRM LO Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF BREAKER CLOSED Off Range Off On MESSAGE AR1 RESET LOCKOUT ON MANUAL CLOSE Off Range Off On MESSAGE AR1 BKR CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR1 BKR OPEN Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLS 10 000 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR1 DEAD TIME 1 1 000 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s ...

Страница 385: ...e is initiated provided the circuit breaker is in the closed state before protection operation The reclose in progress RIP is set when a reclosing cycle begins following a reclose initiate signal Once the cycle is suc cessfully initiated the RIP signal will seal in and the scheme will continue through its sequence until one of the following conditions is satisfied The close signal is issued when t...

Страница 386: ...e to reset from Lockout when the breaker is manually closed regardless if the breaker remains closed or not This setting overrides the previ ous setting AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF BREAKER CLOSED AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLS The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after the associated circuit breaker is manually closed This prevents reclosing onto a fault after a manual close Th...

Страница 387: ... 0 On 1 On 1 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 AR1 ENABLED AR1 DISABLED AR1 BLK FROM MAN CLS Enabled Default Disabled Default AR1 RIP AR1 LO LO AND AND AND AND OR O O O O O O O O Off 0 Off 0 SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLOSE AR1 RESET LOCKOUT DELAY AR1 DEAD TIME 4 AR1 DELAY 1 AR1 DELAY 2 AR1 ADD DELAY 1 AR1 ADD DELAY 2 Shot cnt 3 Sh...

Страница 388: ... 3 AR1 SHOT CNT 1 AR1 SHOT CNT 0 Increment shot counter Shot cnt 2 Shot cnt 1 Shot cnt 0 Reset shot counter Shot cnt 3 AUTORECLOSE 1 SHOT COUNT 0 1 2 3 4 AR1 CLOSE AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND 100 ms AND OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING AR1 RESET TIME AR1 MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS AR1 REDUCE MAX TO 1 AR1 REDUCE MAX TO 2 AR1 REDUCE MAX TO 3 MAX 1 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 MAX 2 ...

Страница 389: ...ARATE OPENING TIME CLOSING TIME PROT TIME OPENING TIME PROT TIME ARC EXTINGUISHES ARC EXTINGUISHES CLOSE COMMAND CLOSED COMMAND BKR CLOSED AR INITIATE AR GOES TO LOCKOUT SHOT COUNT MAX RESET FROM LOCKOUT AR ENABLED LOCKOUT RIP INCOMPL SEQ TIMING RESET TIMER IS TIMING INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE IS TIMING DEAD TIME RECLOSE IN PROGRESS CONTACTS CLOSE TRIP COMMAND CONTACTS SEPARATE BKR OPEN AR ENABLED AUTO R...

Страница 390: ...or pickup and reset delays for the output operand DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation If a pickup delay is not required set to 0 To avoid nuisance alarms set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY...

Страница 391: ...a low level of current well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared In most breaker control circuits the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open see diagram below To prevent unwanted alarms ...

Страница 392: ... circuit In this case it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off In this case the settings are as follows EnerVista UR Setup example shown Figure 5 120 TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2 The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid state contact with voltage monito...

Страница 393: ...o EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at the...

Страница 394: ...rand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen value w...

Страница 395: ...BREAKER FLASHOVER 2 See page 5 267 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 See page 5 272 MESSAGE INCIPIENT FAULT 1 See page 5 275 MESSAGE INCIPIENT FAULT 2 See page 5 275 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 1 See page 5 277 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 2 See page 5 277 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 3 See page 5 277 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 4 See page 5 277 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 See page 5 279 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 2 See page...

Страница 396: ... or a grounded object Arcing fault any high impedance fault which exhibits arcing MESSAGE HI Z ARCING SENSITIVITY 5 Range 1 to 10 in steps of 1 MESSAGE HI Z ARCING DET SOE RESET TIME 0 0 s Range 0 0 to 6000 0 s in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE HI Z PHASE EVENT COUNT 30 Range 10 to 250 in steps of 1 MESSAGE HI Z GROUND EVENT COUNT 30 Range 10 to 500 in steps of 1 MESSAGE HI Z EVENT COUNT TIME 15 min Range 5...

Страница 397: ... which capture to save The RMS data capture contains the two cycle RMS values for the voltage and current for each of the phases and cur rent for the neutral channel The capture frequency is half the system frequency Each capture contains 1800 points High Z Data Capture Hi Z Data Captures are triggered and maintained in an identical manner as RMS Data Cap tures The relay maintains four captures of...

Страница 398: ... state then it moves from the Armed state directly back to the Normal state Two FlexLogic operands HI Z ARMED and HI Z DISARMED are created to represent the armed state of the Hi Z element The HI Z ARMED operand is on when the algorithm is in the armed state whereas the HI Z DISARMED operand is on when the algorithm is not in the armed state When the algorithm is armed this also includes the arcin...

Страница 399: ...expires It is recommended that this timeout value not exceed 30 seconds because arcing fault current often diminishes as the fault progresses making the fault more difficult to detect with increasing time After the timeout has expired at least one additional arc burst must occur in order for the Hi Z element to proceed with its analysis HI Z PHASE OC MIN PICKUP Phase overcurrent minimum pickup ind...

Страница 400: ...the voltage is depressed Thus if the voltage level drops by a percentage greater than this threshold in successive two cycle RMS samples the Loss of Load flag will be blocked If the setting is 0 the voltage supervision function will be disabled HI Z VOLTAGE SUPV DELAY This setting adds time delay to the voltage supervision function Specifically the Loss of Load flag will continue to be blocked for...

Страница 401: ...CT SETTING EAD COUNT LIMIT HI Z GROUND EVENT COUNT INDIRECT SETTING EAD THRESHOLD HI Z EVENT COUNT TIME IA RMS VA RMS VB RMS VC RMS IB RMS IC RMS IG RMS Enabled 1 OR OR RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN LOAD EVENT DETECTOR ALGORITHM EVEN HARM RESTR ALG VOLTAGE SUPERVISION ALG IA Threshold IB Threshold IC Threshold IA Threshold IB Threshold IC Threshold IA PKP IB PKP IC PKP IG PKP IA Threshold IB...

Страница 402: ...lt duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account for a non zero reset time of the overcurrent function Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1 2 menus BKR 1...

Страница 403: ...em 5 265 5 SETTINGS 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 123 ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT Initiate Breaker Contacts Part Arc Extinguished 100 ms Programmable Start Delay Start Integration Stop Integration Total Area Breaker Arcing Current kA cycle ...

Страница 404: ...G AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 NO 0 YES 1 Enabled 1 AND AND OR 859750A1 CDR KA Cycle Limit 2 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP DELAY 100 ms 0 0 Set All To Zero Add to Accumulator Integrate I...

Страница 405: ...e SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP 0 600 pu Range 0 000 to...

Страница 406: ... prior to flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 ΔVA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 3 ΔVA is greater than pickup not applicable in this sche...

Страница 407: ...K 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro vide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP This setting specifies a picku...

Страница 408: ...per breaker pole that supervise the operation of the element per phase Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements breaker failure and close and trip commands A six cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected ...

Страница 409: ... 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 none VB Vb IB Block OFF 0 VA PKP FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 Phase B logic Phase B logic Phase B logic Phase ...

Страница 410: ...h a magnitude greater than the threshold is resumed at least of a cycle later than the phase current interruption then a breaker restrike condi BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE BKR RSTR 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP 0 500 pu Range 0 10 ...

Страница 411: ...the breaker failure function or a regular instantaneous overcurrent element Also a fast succession of restrikes will be picked up by breaker failure or instantaneous overcurrent protection The following settings are available for each element BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION This setting enable and disables operation of the breaker restrike detection ele ment BRK RSTR 1 BLOCK This setting is used to bl...

Страница 412: ...perand indicating a breaker open command It must be logic 1 when breaker is opened either manually or from protection logic BRK RSTR 1 CLS CMD This setting assigns a FlexLogic operand indicating a breaker close command It must be logic 1 when breaker is closed Figure 5 128 BREAKER RESTRIKE SCHEME LOGIC RUN Current interruption detection logic I 0 05 pu mag for t cycle ARMED RESET SETTING Enabled B...

Страница 413: ...the incipient fault pattern is confirmed and therefore detected The following figure illustrates a recorded field case of an incipient phase B fault The top portion of the figure shows the raw A B and C currents The bottom portion shows the neutral current blue and reveals the fault period from under the load and the superimposed phase B current red The superimposed current shows two fault current...

Страница 414: ...l current INCIPNT FLT 1 MODE There are two modes of operation available for the incipient cable fault detector element In the Number of counts mode a trip will be initiated only after the selected number of faults is detected In the Counts per window mode a trip will be initiated only after the selected number of faults is detected within the time specified by the INCIPNT FLT 1 DETECT WINDOW setti...

Страница 415: ...s declared it is sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de energized positive sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels The VT FUSE FAILURE 1 FUNCTION setting enables and disables the fuse failure feature for Source 1 VT Fuse Fail The VT NEU WIRE OPEN 1 FUNCT...

Страница 416: ...V_1 0 05 pu Run V_2 0 1 pu Run I_1 0 075 pu Run V_1 0 80 pu Run I_1 0 05 pu SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 2 cycles 20 cycles SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIMER OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand applies to the C60 D60 L60 L90 N60 Neutral Wire Open Detect SETTING Enabled 1 SOURCE 1 3V_0 3rd Harmonic SETTING Run 3V_0 ...

Страница 417: ...he I_2 I_1 ratio with a balanced remaining two phases is 50 So normally this setting should be set below 50 for example to 30 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN This setting specifies the minimum positive sequence current supervision level Ensure this setting is programmed to a sufficient level to prevent I_2 I_1 from erratic pickup due to a low I_1 signal However this setting should not be set too high si...

Страница 418: ...TTING Run 0 2 cyc FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BROKEN CONDUCT 1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BROKEN CONDUCT 1 PKP 832030A1 cdr I1 Ia Ib Ic I1 I1 MIN Ia I1 MIN Ib I1 MIN Ic I1 MIN Ic Ia Ia 0 05 pu Ib Ib 0 05 pu Ic Ic 0 05 pu Where I is four cycles old BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN AND AND AND OR OR AND One phase current loss detection 0 t PKP SETTING BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX SETTINGS Run BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I2 I1 RATIO I...

Страница 419: ...ve is defined as follows EQ 5 33 In the above equations top time to operate τop thermal protection trip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTE...

Страница 420: ...e delayed using following formula EQ 5 34 In the above equation τrst thermal protection trip time constant Tmin is a minimum reset time setting Figure 5 133 IEC 255 8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle When current is greater than the pickup level In k IB element st...

Страница 421: ...calculations are performed per phase If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0 05 in all three phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 134 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 37 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME CONSTANT MI...

Страница 422: ...e to the feeder by detecting that all phase currents have declined to zero for some time When zero current on all phases has been detected a timer is started This timer is set to an interval after which it is expected the normal load diversity will have been lost so setting groups are not changed for short duration outages After the delay interval the output operand is set The second initiation me...

Страница 423: ...GE Multilin F60 Feeder Protection System 5 285 5 SETTINGS 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 136 COLD LOAD PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC ...

Страница 424: ...r settable debounce time in order for the F60 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that val...

Страница 425: ...lter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 137 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a c...

Страница 426: ... operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a...

Страница 427: ...event damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is ...

Страница 428: ... coil of the contact The relay will seal in this input to safely open the contact Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 off any activity of the RESET input such as subsequent chattering will not have any effect With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active logic 1 the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting OUTPUT H1a TYPE This setting spe...

Страница 429: ...pecific sequence of operation such as make before break If required the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con trol inputs as shown in the next application example Application Example 3 A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below Write the followi...

Страница 430: ...y GOOSE messages have additional advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN virtual LAN and Ethernet priority tagging functionality The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre defined events and 30 user defined events All remaining b...

Страница 431: ...d in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE GOOSE ID setting Likewise the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE mes sage is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSSE GSSE ID setting In F60 rel...

Страница 432: ...erSt 32 and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32 The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE GOOSE message A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate ...

Страница 433: ...te double point status input REM DPS IN 1 DEV This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote Devices section REM DPS IN 1 ITEM This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double point status item from a GOOSE ...

Страница 434: ...latch the faceplate LED event indicators target message and or graphical panel annunciator windows Once set the latching mechanism holds all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches not including FlexLogic latches to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared The RESET...

Страница 435: ... communication exchange the input will default to Logic 1 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest Off freezes the input in case of lost communications If the latest state is not known such as after relay power up but before the first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 0 When communication resumes the input be...

Страница 436: ...nal from downstream devices say 2 3 and 4 to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar as shown in the figure below Figure 5 142 SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2 3 and 4 to block Device 1 If not blocked Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay...

Страница 437: ...hitecture shown below The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission Figure 5 144 SINGLE CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly Therefore Device 2 must act as a bridge The fol lowing settings should be applied UR IED 1 DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER 2 this is...

Страница 438: ...Logic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel This allows the user to create distributed protec tion and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality The teleprotection function must be ...

Страница 439: ...puts is dependent on the number of com munication channels and terminals On two terminal two channel systems they are processed continuously on each chan nel and mapped separately per channel Therefore to achieve redundancy the user must assign the same operand on both channels teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end On three terminal t...

Страница 440: ... values with no units The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to configure GOOSE Analog so that it can be used in a FlexElement GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG 1 DEFAULT 1000 000 Range 1000000 000 to 1000000 000 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE Default Value Range Default Value Last Known MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS Range up to 4 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG ...

Страница 441: ...lues between any two UR series devices The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value This setting is stored as a 32 bit unsigned integer number Table 5 39 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS ELEMENT BASE UNITS BREA...

Страница 442: ...ast Known the value of the GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value When the sending device is offline and this setting value is Default Value then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other F60 functions that use FlexInteger values ...

Страница 443: ... automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with the pr...

Страница 444: ... automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the channel a...

Страница 445: ... 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160 320 161 04 259 30 ...

Страница 446: ...u an exam ple for channel M5 is shown The relay checks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 37 where x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE ...

Страница 447: ...tem measured via UR series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the DCmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA The following settings are applied on the relay CT ratio 1200 5 VT secondary 115 VT connection is delta and VT ratio 120 The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0 90 The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20 overloa...

Страница 448: ...are EQ 5 46 The base unit for voltage refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details is EQ 5 47 The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 48 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE SRC 2 V_1 mag DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL 0 404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL 0 635 pu The limit settings differ from th...

Страница 449: ...s based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the F60 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay set...

Страница 450: ...across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis abled Open or C...

Страница 451: ...3 should open and contact input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully opera tional The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled and TE...

Страница 452: ...MESSAGE PMU 1 VC TEST ANGLE 120 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST ANGLE 0 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST MAGNITUDE 1 000 kA Range 0 000 to 9 999 kA in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST ANGLE 10 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU ...

Страница 453: ... the outgoing data frames When required it is recommended to use the user pro grammable digital channels to signal the IEEE C37 118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measure ments The UR Synchrophasor Implementation defines a test mode which sends a pre defined set of Synchrophasors out over the communication channel when the test mode function setting is enabled In test ...

Страница 454: ...5 316 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 5 10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS 5 ...

Страница 455: ...CONTACT OUTPUTS See page 6 5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 6 AUTORECLOSE See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 7 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 7 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 7 FLEX STATES See page 6 8 ETHERNET See page 6 8 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING See page 6 8 HIZ STATUS See page 6 9 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6 9 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS See page 6 10 IEC 6...

Страница 456: ...TIONAL POWER See page 6 23 SYNCHROCHECK See page 6 23 TRACKING FREQUENCY See page 6 24 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE See page 6 24 FLEXELEMENTS See page 6 24 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 6 25 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 See page 6 25 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 2 See page 6 25 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT See page 6 25 PMU AGGREGATOR See page 6 26 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS See page 6 26 TRANSDUCER I O ...

Страница 457: ...1 OVERVIEW 6 EVENT RECORDS See page 6 28 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6 29 DATA LOGGER See page 6 29 PMU RECORDS See page 6 30 MAINTENANCE See page 6 30 HIZ RECORDS See page 6 31 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION See page 6 32 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6 32 ...

Страница 458: ...es the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been establish...

Страница 459: ...e The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output For example Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAGE REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAG...

Страница 460: ...put 6 2 8 AUTORECLOSE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE 1 2 The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here 6 2 9 REMOTE DEVICES a STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online If the corresponding state i...

Страница 461: ...COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 8 The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here The status of each counter with the user defined counter name includes the accumulated and frozen counts the count units label will also appear Also included is the date and time stamp for the frozen count The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp 6 2 11 SELECTO...

Страница 462: ...PTP grandmaster this actual value is zero The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be globally unique so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster capable clocks FLEX STATES PARAM 1 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 2 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 256 Off Off Range Off On ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK MESSAGE ETHERN...

Страница 463: ... IRIG B DELTA is the time difference measured in nanoseconds between the fractional seconds portion of the time being received via PTP and that being received via IRIG B A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to IRIG B time 6 2 15 HI Z STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS HIZ STATUS The current status of high impedance fault detection element is displayed here Refer to Theory of ope...

Страница 464: ...NPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT 32 values represent the state of each direct input 6 2 17 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16 6 2 18 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS The F60 Feeder Protection System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability...

Страница 465: ...ection is disabled CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission this count can be reset to 0 through the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification check...

Страница 466: ...example the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4 Once an EnerVista session is opened on a computer connected to the UR over Ethernet the Modbus TCP status shows 3 If the EnerVista application is closed the Modbus TCP status shows 4 MMS TCP The number of IEC 61850 connections remaining PMU TCP The maximum number of PMU TCP connections matches the number of aggregators The maximum number of...

Страница 467: ...TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error bad port code frame length too short MISMATCHES PORT A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in the frame do not match MISMATCHES PORT B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in the fr...

Страница 468: ...ve PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 Q Q ...

Страница 469: ...s not measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c UR CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate voltage symm...

Страница 470: ...rated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3 187...

Страница 471: ...AL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 19 MESSAGE POWER SRC 1 See page 6 19 MESSAGE ENERGY SRC 1 See page 6 20 MESSAGE DEMAND SRC 1 See page 6 21 MESSAGE FREQUENCY SRC 1 See page 6 22 MESSAGE CURRENT HARMONICS SRC 1 Se...

Страница 472: ...urce see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ic 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR In 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ I1 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ig 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ig 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC ...

Страница 473: ...NGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vab 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vca 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vx 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vx 0 000 V 0 0 P...

Страница 474: ... and VCB are phase to phase voltage phasors Î is the conjugate of I g ENERGY METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 ENERGY The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES Because energy values are accumulated these valu...

Страница 475: ...statistical metering purposes Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DEMAND SRC 1 SRC 1 DMD IA 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC MAX 0 ...

Страница 476: ...lter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients j CURRENT HARMONICS AND THD METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 CURRENT HARMONICS The metered current harmonics values are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES Current harmonics ar...

Страница 477: ...connected phase VTs Ensure the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT XX CONNECTION setting is Wye to enable voltage harmonics metering 6 3 3 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here The display may be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating ...

Страница 478: ...F CHANGE 2 0 00 Hz s MESSAGE FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 3 0 00 Hz s MESSAGE FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 4 0 00 Hz s FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig 0 000 pu Table 6 2 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS Sheet 1 of 2 BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS Brk X Acc Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 1 kA2 cycle DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two t...

Страница 479: ...ic zero sequence directional element operating power values 6 3 10 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU 1 SOURCE THD HARMONICS BASE 1 SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the IN and IN inputs IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS ANALOG I...

Страница 480: ... 1500 bytes result in fragmented data frames causing increased network traffic 6 3 12 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 6 The differential and restraint current values for the restricted ground fault element are displayed in this menu MESSAGE PMU 1 V2 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V0 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Substituted with z...

Страница 481: ...hat is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx 0 000 mA RTD...

Страница 482: ...cords have been filled the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added Each event record shows the event identifier sequence number cause and date time stamp associated with the event trigger See the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records Only major output operands generate events not every operand Elements that assert output per phase for example log operating phase out...

Страница 483: ...cords 6 4 4 DATA LOGGER PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS DATA LOGGER The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken It will be static until the log gets full at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken It counts up at the defined sampling rate If the data logge...

Страница 484: ...AR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open PMU RECORDS NUMBER OF TRIGGERS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 RECORDING See below PMU 1 RECORDING PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER Yes Range No Yes MESSAGE PUM 1 AVAILABLE RECORDS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PUM...

Страница 485: ...ctual values If the element is triggered by high impedance fault detection arcing algorithm then the records are dis played in the HIZ 1 to HIZ 4 actual values Refer to High impedance fault detection section in chapter 5 for more information HIZ RECORDS FORCE TRIGGER No MESSAGE HIZ 1 NONE 1970 01 01 00 00 00 MESSAGE HIZ 2 NONE 1970 01 01 00 00 00 MESSAGE HIZ 3 NONE 1970 01 01 00 00 00 MESSAGE HIZ ...

Страница 486: ...ample order code shown MESSAGE SERIAL NUMBER Range standard GE serial number format MESSAGE ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 Range standard Ethernet MAC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE PMU FEATURE ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE CT VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETTI...

Страница 487: ... entry 7 1 2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS MESSAGE COMMANDS...

Страница 488: ...ke effect when the ENTER key is pressed COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Yes CLEAR DATA LOGGER No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 2 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR ENERGY No Range No Yes CLEAR HIZ RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR U...

Страница 489: ...changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted With the CyberSentry option the Administrator or Operator role can initiate the Reboot Relay command The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific F60 service actions Presently there is only one service action available Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non volatile memory If a code other than 101 is ent...

Страница 490: ...t time The PMU ONE SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one shot operation is pending that is the present time is before the scheduled one shot time The PMU ONE SHOT OP operand indicates the one shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards When the function is disabled all three operands are de asserted The one shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given F60 relay Figu...

Страница 491: ...referenced to different time scales Figure 7 2 USING THE PMU ONE SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC The one shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network Two or more PMU can be pre scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time When frozen the measurements could be collected using...

Страница 492: ...ill be included if applicable If a tar get message status changes the status with the highest priority will be displayed If a self test error is detected a message appears indicating the cause of the error For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed 7 1 10 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagnostic check...

Страница 493: ...ed target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is performed The test is event driven performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified What to do Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors Latched target message No Description of problem The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the F60 is not pro gra...

Страница 494: ...as fast distance protection Synchrophasors Frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency calculations to conform to C37 118 2005 standard The new functionality leveraging the hardware is supported with firmware revision 7 25 and above When using an older revision of the process card with a new firmware revision 7 25 Module Failure 31 indicates the limited functionality If your application requires the...

Страница 495: ...ical damage or perform a continuity test The IRIG B receiver is functioning Check the input signal level it may be less than specification If none of these apply then contact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem No PTP enabled port has good PTP signal input How often the test is performed Activated when no acceptable signal is being received What to do Ensure the following ...

Страница 496: ... is performed Every second What to do Check direct input and output configuration and wiring Latched target message No Description of problem One or more GOOSE devices are not responding How often the test is performed Event driven The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check GO...

Страница 497: ...ing down How often the test is performed What to do Check the connection Latched target message No Description of problem The number of failures threshold was exceeded What to do Wait for the lockout interval and try to authenticate again Message Unauthorized firmware attempt Latched target message No Description of problem A firmware upgrade operation was attempted while the lock relay setting wa...

Страница 498: ...vated HARDFIBER SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES In addition to those provided by the standard UR series devices the UR devices implement HardFiber self tests These are listed below Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self test message so troubleshooting is described here For other relays such at the B95Plus see that product s instruction...

Страница 499: ...ngle origin Process Bus Trouble Minor Self Test Description Communications problems with one or more Bricks The text of the message identifies the affected field units This self test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end and by the sustained failure to receive poll responses from the proper Brick Severity This self test error does not directly inhibit p...

Страница 500: ...7 14 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 7 1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 ...

Страница 501: ...tion of an hour to one or two hours lead the Hi Z element to recognize and flag an arcing suspected event None of these brief occurrences of arcing if taken individually are sufficient to indicate detection of a downed conductor or to set off an alarm indicating that persistent arcing has been detected When considered cumula tively however they do indicate a need for attention If an output contact...

Страница 502: ... rithm and indications from multiple independent algorithms are more indicative of the presence of arcing than a single algo rithm giving a single indication 8 1 5 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS ALGORITHM The Spectral Analysis algorithm is the third and final confirmation algorithm performed only when a high impedance condi tion is suspected The Spectral Analysis algorithm receives five seconds of averaged non...

Страница 503: ...in a signal which consists only of the fault component of the neutral current This informa tion is then provided as input to the Arc Burst Pattern Analysis Algorithm 8 1 9 ARC BURST PATTERN ANALYSIS ALGORITHM The Arc Burst Pattern Analysis algorithm attempts to provide faulted phase identification information based on a correlation between the fault component of the measured neutral current and th...

Страница 504: ...l produce a decrease in the line load which can be mistaken by Hi Z element as Loss of Load Every two cycle the voltage on each phase is checked against the HI Z V SUPV THRESHOLD If the voltage on any phase has dropped by a percentage greater then or equal to this setting the Loss of Load flag will be blocked The blocking is not done on a per phase basis If one phase voltage shows a dip the block ...

Страница 505: ...positive sequence impedance of the line The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault F and pre fault load pre components EQ 8 2 and neglecting shunt parameters of the line EQ 8 3 Inserting the IA and IB equations into the VA equation and solving for the fault resistance yields EQ 8 4 Assuming the fault components of the currents IAF and IBF are in phase and obse...

Страница 506: ...ON setting value is V0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supplied neutral voltage EQ 8 13 If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is I0 and the VTs are connected in a wye conf...

Страница 507: ...50DD OP X VA or VAB VC or VCA VB or VBC 827094A5 CDR Off 0 AND FAULT LOCATOR 1 RUN 0 3 SEC ACTUAL VALUES DATE TIME FAULT TYPE FAULT LOCATION FAULT RECLOSE SHOT FAULT REPORT Vn or V_0 FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH UNITS FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM...

Страница 508: ...8 8 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 8 2 FAULT LOCATOR 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 ...

Страница 509: ...nce component As such the same signal must not be injected to all three phases or the injected signal will be completely filtered out For an underfrequency element using phase quantities the phase A signal must be above the MIN VOLT AMP setting value There fore either inject into phase A only or inject a balanced three phase signal Figure 9 1 TYPICAL UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT TEST TIMING The static a...

Страница 510: ...r This is exclusive of the time taken by the frequency responding component to pickup The F60 oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the threshold and element operation however this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency The security features of the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated frequency b...

Страница 511: ...ows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left once the thumb screw has been removed as shown below This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal The new wide angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy...

Страница 512: ...t a module ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position The ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis engage the clips simultaneously When the clips have locked into position the module will...

Страница 513: ... enhanced front panel 4 For the standard front panel it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module which is typically in the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply module and remove th...

Страница 514: ...unit 17 Remove the power supply module by simultaneously pulling the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the module and sliding it out 18 Unscrew all four screws not three that attach the metal cover to the module The fourth screw is at the back end of the module on the opposite side from the clips beside the white electronics part see figure 19 Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 0...

Страница 515: ...μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον προμ...

Страница 516: ... Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen Se produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å indikere at kadmium Cd bly Pb eller kvikksølv Hg forekommer Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjenvi...

Страница 517: ...vsedd deponering För mer information se www recyclethis info TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama n...

Страница 518: ...e for example to comply with data security regu lations On the computer settings files can identified by the urs extension To clear the current settings file create a default set tings file write it to the relay then delete all other urs files For the existing installation upgrading the firmware overwrites the flash memory Other files can be in standard formats such as COMTRADE or csv You cannot e...

Страница 519: ...orrect information Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap foam material or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion the item s You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA to the factory GE GRID SOLUTIONS 650 MARKLA...

Страница 520: ...Store the unit indoors in a cool dry place If possible store in the original packaging Follow the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously NOTICE ...

Страница 521: ... the battery there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life For customers located in the European Union dispose of the battery as outlined earlier To prevent non intended use of the unit remove the modules as outlined earlier dismantle the unit and recycle the metal when possible ...

Страница 522: ...10 12 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin 10 6 DISPOSAL 10 MAINTENANCE 10 ...

Страница 523: ... differential ground current magnitude 5810 RGF 5 Igr Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 5 restricted ground current magnitude 5812 RGF 6 Igd Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 differential ground current magnitude 5814 RGF 6 Igr Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 restricted ground current magnitude 5824 Field RTD 1 Value Field RTD 1 value 5825 Field RTD 2 Value Field RTD 2 value 5826 Field RTD 3 Va...

Страница 524: ...nt angle 6219 SRC 2 Ib Mag Amps Source 2 phase B current magnitude 6221 SRC 2 Ib Angle Degrees Source 2 phase B current angle 6222 SRC 2 Ic Mag Amps Source 2 phase C current magnitude 6224 SRC 2 Ic Angle Degrees Source 2 phase C current angle 6225 SRC 2 In Mag Amps Source 2 neutral current magnitude 6227 SRC 2 In Angle Degrees Source 2 neutral current angle 6228 SRC 2 Ig RMS Amps Source 2 ground c...

Страница 525: ...C 4 Ib Angle Degrees Source 4 phase B current angle 6350 SRC 4 Ic Mag Amps Source 4 phase C current magnitude 6352 SRC 4 Ic Angle Degrees Source 4 phase C current angle 6353 SRC 4 In Mag Amps Source 4 neutral current magnitude 6355 SRC 4 In Angle Degrees Source 4 neutral current angle 6356 SRC 4 Ig RMS Amps Source 4 ground current RMS 6358 SRC 4 Ig Mag Amps Source 4 ground current magnitude 6360 S...

Страница 526: ...e 6728 SRC 2 Vag Angle Degrees Source 2 phase AG voltage angle 6729 SRC 2 Vbg Mag Volts Source 2 phase BG voltage magnitude 6731 SRC 2 Vbg Angle Degrees Source 2 phase BG voltage angle 6732 SRC 2 Vcg Mag Volts Source 2 phase CG voltage magnitude 6734 SRC 2 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 2 phase CG voltage angle 6735 SRC 2 Vab RMS Volts Source 2 phase AB voltage RMS 6737 SRC 2 Vbc RMS Volts Source 2 phas...

Страница 527: ...ude 6824 SRC 3 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 3 positive sequence voltage angle 6825 SRC 3 V_2 Mag Volts Source 3 negative sequence voltage magnitude 6827 SRC 3 V_2 Angle Degrees Source 3 negative sequence voltage angle 6848 SRC 4 Vag RMS Volts Source 4 phase AG voltage RMS 6850 SRC 4 Vbg RMS Volts Source 4 phase BG voltage RMS 6852 SRC 4 Vcg RMS Volts Source 4 phase CG voltage RMS 6854 SRC 4 Vag Mag Vo...

Страница 528: ...se C power factor 7200 SRC 2 P Watts Source 2 three phase real power 7202 SRC 2 Pa Watts Source 2 phase A real power 7204 SRC 2 Pb Watts Source 2 phase B real power 7206 SRC 2 Pc Watts Source 2 phase C real power 7208 SRC 2 Q Vars Source 2 three phase reactive power 7210 SRC 2 Qa Vars Source 2 phase A reactive power 7212 SRC 2 Qb Vars Source 2 phase B reactive power 7214 SRC 2 Qc Vars Source 2 pha...

Страница 529: ...mps Source 1 phase C current demand 7686 SRC 1 Demand Watt Watts Source 1 real power demand 7688 SRC 1 Demand var Vars Source 1 reactive power demand 7690 SRC 1 Demand Va VA Source 1 apparent power demand 7696 SRC 2 Demand Ia Amps Source 2 phase A current demand 7698 SRC 2 Demand Ib Amps Source 2 phase B current demand 7700 SRC 2 Demand Ic Amps Source 2 phase C current demand 7702 SRC 2 Demand Wat...

Страница 530: ...ic 8094 SRC 1 Vb Harm 6 Source 1 phase B voltage sixth harmonic 8095 SRC 1 Vb Harm 7 Source 1 phase B voltage seventh harmonic 8096 SRC 1 Vb Harm 8 Source 1 phase B voltage eighth harmonic 8097 SRC 1 Vb Harm 9 Source 1 phase B voltage ninth harmonic 8098 SRC 1 Vb Harm 10 Source 1 phase B voltage tenth harmonic 8099 SRC 1 Vb Harm 11 Source 1 phase B voltage eleventh harmonic 8100 SRC 1 Vb Harm 12 S...

Страница 531: ...onic 8141 SRC 2 Va Harm 3 Source 2 phase A voltage third harmonic 8142 SRC 2 Va Harm 4 Source 2 phase A voltage fourth harmonic 8143 SRC 2 Va Harm 5 Source 2 phase A voltage fifth harmonic 8144 SRC 2 Va Harm 6 Source 2 phase A voltage sixth harmonic 8145 SRC 2 Va Harm 7 Source 2 phase A voltage seventh harmonic 8146 SRC 2 Va Harm 8 Source 2 phase A voltage eighth harmonic 8147 SRC 2 Va Harm 9 Sour...

Страница 532: ...RC 2 Vb Harm 25 Source 2 phase B voltage twenty fifth harmonic 8189 SRC 2 Vc THD Source 2 phase C voltage total harmonic distortion THD 8190 SRC 2 Vc Harm 2 Source 2 phase C voltage second harmonic 8191 SRC 2 Vc Harm 3 Source 2 phase C voltage third harmonic 8192 SRC 2 Vc Harm 4 Source 2 phase C voltage fourth harmonic 8193 SRC 2 Vc Harm 5 Source 2 phase C voltage fifth harmonic 8194 SRC 2 Vc Harm...

Страница 533: ... 1 pre fault phase A current angle 9027 Prefault Ib Mag 1 Amps Fault 1 pre fault phase B current magnitude 9029 Prefault Ib Ang 1 Degrees Fault 1 pre fault phase B current angle 9030 Prefault Ic Mag 1 Amps Fault 1 pre fault phase C current magnitude 9032 Prefault Ic Ang 1 Degrees Fault 1 pre fault phase C current angle 9033 Prefault Va Mag 1 Volts Fault 1 pre fault phase A voltage magnitude 9035 P...

Страница 534: ...rees Phasor measurement unit 1 negative sequence voltage angle 9599 PMU 1 V0 Mag Volts Phasor measurement unit 1 zero sequence voltage magnitude 9601 PMU 1 V0 Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 zero sequence voltage angle 9602 PMU 1 Ia Mag Amps Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current magnitude 9604 PMU 1 Ia Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current angle 9605 PMU 1 Ib Mag Amps...

Страница 535: ...n 10274 SRC 1 Ib Harm 2 Source 1 phase B current second harmonic 10275 SRC 1 Ib Harm 3 Source 1 phase B current third harmonic 10276 SRC 1 Ib Harm 4 Source 1 phase B current fourth harmonic 10277 SRC 1 Ib Harm 5 Source 1 phase B current fifth harmonic 10278 SRC 1 Ib Harm 6 Source 1 phase B current sixth harmonic 10279 SRC 1 Ib Harm 7 Source 1 phase B current seventh harmonic 10280 SRC 1 Ib Harm 8 ...

Страница 536: ... 1 Ic Harm 24 Source 1 phase C current twenty fourth harmonic 10330 SRC 1 Ic Harm 25 Source 1 phase C current twenty fifth harmonic 10339 SRC 2 Ia THD Source 2 phase A current total harmonic distortion 10340 SRC 2 Ia Harm 2 Source 2 phase A current second harmonic 10341 SRC 2 Ia Harm 3 Source 2 phase A current third harmonic 10342 SRC 2 Ia Harm 4 Source 2 phase A current fourth harmonic 10343 SRC ...

Страница 537: ... 2 Ib Harm 21 Source 2 phase B current twenty first harmonic 10393 SRC 2 Ib Harm 22 Source 2 phase B current twenty second harmonic 10394 SRC 2 Ib Harm 23 Source 2 phase B current twenty third harmonic 10395 SRC 2 Ib Harm 24 Source 2 phase B current twenty fourth harmonic 10396 SRC 2 Ib Harm 25 Source 2 phase B current twenty fifth harmonic 10405 SRC 2 Ic THD Source 2 phase C current total harmoni...

Страница 538: ... SRC 3 Ia Harm 18 Source 3 phase A current eighteenth harmonic 10456 SRC 3 Ia Harm 19 Source 3 phase A current nineteenth harmonic 10457 SRC 3 Ia Harm 20 Source 3 phase A current twentieth harmonic 10458 SRC 3 Ia Harm 21 Source 3 phase A current twenty first harmonic 10459 SRC 3 Ia Harm 22 Source 3 phase A current twenty second harmonic 10460 SRC 3 Ia Harm 23 Source 3 phase A current twenty third ...

Страница 539: ...rm 13 Source 3 phase C current thirteenth harmonic 10517 SRC 3 Ic Harm 14 Source 3 phase C current fourteenth harmonic 10518 SRC 3 Ic Harm 15 Source 3 phase C current fifteenth harmonic 10519 SRC 3 Ic Harm 16 Source 3 phase C current sixteenth harmonic 10520 SRC 3 Ic Harm 17 Source 3 phase C current seventeenth harmonic 10521 SRC 3 Ic Harm 18 Source 3 phase C current eighteenth harmonic 10522 SRC ...

Страница 540: ...ual value 13562 RTD Ip 11 RTD input 11 actual value 13563 RTD Ip 12 RTD input 12 actual value 13564 RTD Ip 13 RTD input 13 actual value 13565 RTD Ip 14 RTD input 14 actual value 13566 RTD Ip 15 RTD input 15 actual value 13567 RTD Ip 16 RTD input 16 actual value 13568 RTD Ip 17 RTD input 17 actual value 13569 RTD Ip 18 RTD input 18 actual value 13570 RTD Ip 19 RTD input 19 actual value 13571 RTD Ip...

Страница 541: ...lement 6 actual value 39180 FlexElement 7 Value FlexElement 7 actual value 39182 FlexElement 8 Value FlexElement 8 actual value 41132 V0 3rd Harmonic 1 Volts VTFF 1 V0 3rd Harmonic 41134 V0 3rd Harmonic 2 Volts VTFF 2 V0 3rd Harmonic 41136 V0 3rd Harmonic 3 Volts VTFF 3 V0 3rd Harmonic 45584 GOOSE Analog In 1 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 45586 GOOSE Analog In 2 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 455...

Страница 542: ...63248 HZ Ic Odd Harmonics Volts HIZ Ic odd harmonics 63250 HZ Ig Odd Harmonics Volts HIZ Ig odd harmonics 63252 HZ Ia Even Harmonics Volts HIZ Ia even harmonics 63254 HZ Ib Even Harmonics Volts HIZ Ib even harmonics 63256 HZ Ic Even Harmonics Volts HIZ Ic even harmonics 63258 HZ Ig Even Harmonics Volts HIZ Ig even harmonics 63260 HZ Ia Non Harmonics Volts HIZ Ia non harmonics 63262 HZ Ib Non Harmo...

Страница 543: ...HIZ Ig harmonics 38 63306 HZ Ig Harmonics 39 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 39 63307 HZ Ig Harmonics 40 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 40 63308 HZ Ig Harmonics 41 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 41 63309 HZ Ig Harmonics 42 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 42 63310 HZ Ig Harmonics 43 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 43 63311 HZ Ig Harmonics 44 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 44 63312 HZ Ig Harmonics 45 Volts HIZ Ig harmonics 45 63313 HZ Ig Harmonics 4...

Страница 544: ...nt Input 3 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 3 9974 GOOSE UInt Input 4 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 4 9976 GOOSE UInt Input 5 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 5 9978 GOOSE UInt Input 6 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 6 9980 GOOSE UInt Input 7 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 7 9982 GOOSE UInt Input 8 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 8 9984 GOOSE UInt Input 9 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 9 9986 GOOSE UInt Input...

Страница 545: ...e in packets that are groups of asynchronously framed byte data The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet The following information describes the general for mat for both transmit and receive packets For details on packet formatting see subsequent sections describing each func tion code SLAVE ADDRESS This is the address of the slave device that is intended to ...

Страница 546: ...col Identifier Used for intra system multiplexing The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0 Length The length field is a byte count of the following fields including the Unit Identifier and data fields Unit Identifier For the purposes of the UR this field is equivalent to the Modbus RTU SLAVE ADDRESS field The client must use the same value here as programmed in the UR setting MODBUS SLAVE ...

Страница 547: ...umber of data bytes Di i th data byte i 0 to N 1 G 16 bit characteristic polynomial 1010000000000001 binary with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr x right shift operator th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag a 0 is shifted into the MSbit of x all other bits are shifted right one location ALGORITHM 1 FFFF hex A 2 0 i 3 0 j 4 Di Alow Alow 5 j 1 j 6 shr A 7 Is there a carry No go to 8 Yes...

Страница 548: ... identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packetsin Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the values 40 300 and 0 from registers 4050h 4051h and 4052h...

Страница 549: ...at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h 17 dec Table B 5 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high FF ...

Страница 550: ...e function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h Table B 8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FO...

Страница 551: ...cific file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE C3...

Страница 552: ...T replace nnn with the desired starting record number To read from a specific record to another specific record use the following filename EVT TXT xxxxx yyyyy replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number g READING FAULT REPORT FILES Fault report data has been available via the F60 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2 00 The file name is faul...

Страница 553: ...upplier Serial Number F203 none 00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number 8 items F203 none Product Information Read Only Written by Factory 0110 FPGA Version F206 none 0113 FPGA Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 Product Information Read Write 0120 Undefined 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Self Test Targets Read Only 0200 Self Test States 4 items 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0 Front Panel Read Only 0208 LED Column n State n...

Страница 554: ... Virtual Input 41 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0429 Virtual Input 42 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042A Virtual Input 43 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042B Virtual Input 44 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042C Virtual Input 45 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042D Virtual Input 46 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042E Virtual Input 47 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042F Virtual Input 48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input 4...

Страница 555: ...nput 23 05E0 Repeated for Binary Input 24 05E4 Repeated for Binary Input 25 05E8 Repeated for Binary Input 26 05EC Repeated for Binary Input 27 05F0 Repeated for Binary Input 28 05F4 Repeated for Binary Input 29 05F8 Repeated for Binary Input 30 05FC Repeated for Binary Input 31 0600 Repeated for Binary Input 32 0604 Repeated for Binary Input 33 0608 Repeated for Binary Input 34 060C Repeated for ...

Страница 556: ...eated for Binary Input 81 06C8 Repeated for Binary Input 82 06CC Repeated for Binary Input 83 06D0 Repeated for Binary Input 84 06D4 Repeated for Binary Input 85 06D8 Repeated for Binary Input 86 06DC Repeated for Binary Input 87 06E0 Repeated for Binary Input 88 06E4 Repeated for Binary Input 89 06E8 Repeated for Binary Input 90 06EC Repeated for Binary Input 91 06F0 Repeated for Binary Input 92 ...

Страница 557: ...actor 9 0 to 65 535 0 001 F001 1000 0722 IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 9 32768 to 32767 1 F002 0 0723 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 2 0742 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 3 0761 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 4 IEC 103 Commands Read Write Setting 32 modules 0780 IEC103 Command 1 FUN 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0781 IEC103 Command 1 INF 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0782 IEC103 Command 1 Param ON 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0783 IEC103 Command 1 ...

Страница 558: ...56 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 14E1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Write 14E2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E3 Target Message F200 Contact Input Output States Read Only 1500 Contact Input States 6 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1508 Virtual Input States 8 items 0 to 65535 1 F500...

Страница 559: ...0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160C Field Unit Online Offline States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160D Field RTD Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 160E Field Transducer Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 Ethernet Fibre Channel Status Read Only 1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail 1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 1 F134 0 Fail 1612 Ethernet Tertiary Fibre Chan...

Страница 560: ...F060 0 1813 Source 1 Neutral Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1814 Source 1 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1816 Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1818 Source 1 Ground Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1819 Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 181B Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to ...

Страница 561: ... 3 1AC0 Repeated for Source 4 Source Power Read Only 4 modules 1C00 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C02 Source 1 Phase A Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C04 Source 1 Phase B Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C06 Source 1 Phase C Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C08 Source 1 Thr...

Страница 562: ...o 4294967295 1 F050 0 1E84 Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1E86 Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 1E88 Source 1 Demand Ic Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1E8A Source 1 Demand Ic Maximum Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 1E8C Source 1 Demand Watt Maximum 0 to 999999 999 W 0 001 F060 0 1E8E Source 1 Demand Watt Maximum Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0...

Страница 563: ... F001 0 21E7 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase B 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 Breaker Arcing Current Actual Values Read Only Non Volatile 2 modules 21E8 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 21E9 Breaker 1 Operating Time 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 21EA Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actual Values Read Only Non Volatile 2 modules 21EE Repeated for module number 2 Breaker A...

Страница 564: ...rent Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2355 Fault 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2357 Fault 1 Phase B Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2358 Fault 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 235A Fault 1 Phase C Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 235B Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 235D Fault 1 Phase ...

Страница 565: ... A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2584 PMU 1 Phase A Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 2585 PMU 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2587 PMU 1 Phase B Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 2588 PMU 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 258A PMU 1 Phase C Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 258B PMU 1 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999...

Страница 566: ...4294967295 1 F003 0 270A IEC 61850 Received uinteger 14 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 270C IEC 61850 Received uinteger 15 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 270E IEC 61850 Received uinteger 16 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 Source Current THD and Harmonics Read Only 4 modules 2800 Ia THD for Source 1 0 to 99 9 0 1 F001 0 2801 Ia Harmonics for Source 1 2nd to 25th 24 items 0 to 99 9 0 1 F001 0 2821 Ib THD for Source 1 ...

Страница 567: ...4967295 1 F050 0 Modbus File Transfer Read Write 3100 Name of file to read F204 none Modbus File Transfer Values Read Only 3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 3202 Size of currently available data block 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 3203 Block of data from requested file 122 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Security Read Write Setting 3280 Administrator Alphanumeric Passwo...

Страница 568: ...o 1 1 F126 0 No 3352 Administrator Logoff 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 3353 Clear Security Data 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Security Reserved Modbus Registers Read Write 3360 Address 0x3360 reserved for serial login 20 items 0 to 9999 1 F001 3 3374 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 9999 1 F001 3 Security Reserved Modbus Registers Read Only 3375 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 5 1 F617 3 E...

Страница 569: ... Input 12 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34FC RTD Input 13 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34FD RTD Input 14 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34FE RTD Input 15 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34FF RTD Input 16 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3500 RTD Input 17 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3501 RTD Input 18 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3502 RTD Input 19 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3503 RTD...

Страница 570: ...Retries 0 to 9999 1 F001 3 3743 RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret F202 none PTP Basic Configuration Read Write Setting 3750 PTP Strict Power Profile 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3751 PTP Domain Number 0 to 255 1 F001 0 3752 PTP VLAN Priority 0 to 7 1 F001 4 3753 PTP VLAN ID 0 to 4095 1 F001 0 3754 Undefined 2 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 PTP Port Configuration Read Write Setting 3 modules 3756 PTP Port 1 F...

Страница 571: ... CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 1 F123 0 1 A 3899 Remote Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 1 F100 0 Wye 389A Remote Phase VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 0 1 F001 664 389B Remote Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 1 F060 1 389D Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 1 F166 1 Vag 389E Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 0 1 F001 664 389F Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 1 F060 1 38A1 Repeated for Field Unit 2 38B...

Страница 572: ...eld Contact Input 39 3AAD Repeated for Field Contact Input 40 Field Unit Shared Inputs Read Write Setting 16 modules 3B00 Field Shared Input 1 ID 0 to 65535 1 F205 SI 1 3B06 Field Shared Input 1 Unit Origin 1 0 to 8 1 F256 0 None 3B07 Field Shared Input 1 Channel Origin 1 1 to 15 1 F001 1 3B08 Field Shared Input 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 3B09 Repeated for Field Shared Input 2 3B12 Repeated ...

Страница 573: ...56 0 None 3E39 Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 1 1 to 15 1 F001 1 3E3A Field Shared Output 1 Unit Dest 2 0 to 8 1 F256 0 None 3E3B Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 2 1 to 15 1 F001 1 3E3C Field Shared Output 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 3E3D Repeated for Field Shared Output 2 3E4A Repeated for Field Shared Output 3 3E57 Repeated for Field Shared Output 4 3E64 Repeated for Field Shared Out...

Страница 574: ...ed for Field Unit 7 3FF7 Repeated for Field Unit 8 Passwords Read Write Command 4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none Passwords Read Write Setting 400A Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none Passwords Read Write 4014 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none 401E Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 1 F202 none Passwords Read Only 4028 Command Password ...

Страница 575: ...odbus protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 502 40A4 TCP UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 20000 40A5 TCP Port Number for the HTTP Web Server Protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 80 40A6 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 69 40A7 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol zero means automatic 2 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 ...

Страница 576: ...3 4278190080 4111 Port 3 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554497 4113 Port 3 Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 1 F192 1 Full Duplex 4114 PRT1 GOOSE Enabled 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4115 PRT2 GOOSE Enabled 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4116 PRT3 GOOSE Enabled 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 4117 Default IPv4 Route 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 2130706433 4119 PRT2 PRP Mcst Addr F072 0 411C IEC Communications Res...

Страница 577: ...ad Write Command 41B2 Fault Reports Clear Data Command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Oscillography Read Write Setting 41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 3 to 64 1 F001 5 41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 1 F118 0 Auto Overwrite 41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 1 F001 50 41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 41C5 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 1 F183 2 16 sampl...

Страница 578: ... 38 4332 Repeated for User Programmable LED 39 4335 Repeated for User Programmable LED 40 4338 Repeated for User Programmable LED 41 433B Repeated for User Programmable LED 42 433E Repeated for User Programmable LED 43 4341 Repeated for User Programmable LED 44 4344 Repeated for User Programmable LED 45 4347 Repeated for User Programmable LED 46 434A Repeated for User Programmable LED 47 434D Repe...

Страница 579: ...ed for CT Bank 3 448C Repeated for CT Bank 4 4490 Repeated for CT Bank 5 4494 Repeated for CT Bank 6 VT Settings Read Write Setting 6 modules 4500 Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 1 F100 0 Wye 4501 Phase VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 V 0 1 F001 664 4502 Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 1 1 F060 1 4504 Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 1 F166 1 Vag 4505 Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 V 0 1 F001 664 4506 Auxil...

Страница 580: ...ce 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47E8 Breaker 1 Block Open 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47EA Breaker 1 Block Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47EC Breaker 1 Phase A Three pole Opened 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47EE Breaker 1 Phase B Opened 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47F0 Breaker 1 Phase C Opened 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47F2 Breaker 1 Operate Time 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 70 47F3 Breaker 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0...

Страница 581: ...Data AC7 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E15 Raw Field Data AC8 Mag 0 to 0 001 A V 0 001 F003 0 4E17 Raw Field Data AC8 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E18 Raw Field Data DC1 0 to 0 001 V 0 001 F002 0 4E19 Raw Field Data DC2 0 to 0 001 V 0 001 F002 0 4E1A Raw Field Data DC3 0 to 0 001 V 0 001 F002 0 4E1B Raw Field Data FCI States 2 items 0 to 1 1 F500 0 4E1D Raw Field Data SI States 0 to 1 1...

Страница 582: ...eated for RTD Input 18 5568 Repeated for RTD Input 19 557C Repeated for RTD Input 20 5590 Repeated for RTD Input 21 55A4 Repeated for RTD Input 22 55B8 Repeated for RTD Input 23 55CC Repeated for RTD Input 24 55E0 Repeated for RTD Input 25 55F4 Repeated for RTD Input 26 5608 Repeated for RTD Input 27 561C Repeated for RTD Input 28 5630 Repeated for RTD Input 29 5644 Repeated for RTD Input 30 5658 ...

Страница 583: ...d for FlexLogic Timer 26 58D0 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 27 58D8 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 28 58E0 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 29 58E8 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 30 58F0 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 31 58F8 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 32 Phase Time Overcurrent Read Write Grouped Setting 4 modules 5900 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5901 Phase Time Overcurrent 1...

Страница 584: ...l Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5B0B Reserved 6 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5B11 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 5B22 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 3 5B33 Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 4 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Read Write Grouped Setting 8 modules 5C00 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5C01 Neutral Instantaneous O...

Страница 585: ...rrent 6 5E06 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 5E17 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 Incipient Cable Fault Detector Actual Values Read Only 2 modules 5EC0 Incipient Cable Fault Detector 1 Phase A Counter 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 5EC1 Incipient Cable Fault Detector 1 Phase B Counter 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 5EC2 Incipient Cable Fault Detector 1 Phase C Counter 0 to 65535 1 F001 0...

Страница 586: ... 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1000 6303 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 1 F103 0 IEEE Mod Inv 6304 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 0 01 F001 100 6305 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 1 F104 0 Instantaneous 6306 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6308 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Se...

Страница 587: ...Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG2 Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 2000 6688 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 668A Sensitive Directional Power 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 668B Sensitive Directional Power 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 668C Reserved 5 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 6691 Repeated for Sensitive Directional Power 2 Load Encroachment Read Write Grouped Sett...

Страница 588: ...Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7232 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing 0 to 4 1 F230 0 Voltage 7233 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA 90 to 90 Lag 1 F002 75 7234 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7235 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7236 Neutral Directi...

Страница 589: ...Switch 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 74A1 Disconnect Switch 1 Name F206 SW 1 74A4 Disconnect Switch 1 Mode 0 to 1 1 F157 0 3 Pole 74A5 Disconnect Switch 1 Open 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74A7 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Open 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74A9 Disconnect Switch 1 Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74AB Disconnect Switch 1 Block Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 74AD Disconnect Switch 1 Phase...

Страница 590: ...ems F001 0 77B6 Repeated for Broken Conductor 2 77C2 Repeated for Broken Conductor 3 77CE Repeated for Broken Conductor 4 Ohm Inputs Read Write Setting 2 modules 77F8 Ohm Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 77F9 Ohm Inputs 1 ID F205 Ohm Ip 1 77FF Ohm Inputs 1 Reserved 9 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 7808 Repeated for Ohm Inputs 2 Phasor Measurement Unit Recorder Config Counter Command Read Writ...

Страница 591: ...137 0 Disabled 7B61 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line F202 none 7B6B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text F202 none 7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text F202 none 7B7F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop Out Time 0 to 60 s 0 05 F001 0 7B80 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7B81 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7B82 User P...

Страница 592: ...rvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 300 7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7F09 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves 0 to 3 1 F116 0 ...

Страница 593: ...0 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8401 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 8403 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 50 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000 8404 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 20 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 8418 Reserved 80 items F001 0 EGD Slow Production Read Write Setting 2 modules 8468 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Funct...

Страница 594: ...300 0 862D Repeated for Breaker Failure 2 FlexState Settings Read Write Setting 8800 FlexState Parameters 256 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Digital Elements Read Write Setting 48 modules 8A00 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8A01 Digital Element 1 Name F203 Dig Element 1 8A09 Digital Element 1 Input 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8A0B Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 999999 999 s ...

Страница 595: ...Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8ED1 Trip Bus 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8ED3 Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 0 8ED4 Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 0 8ED5 Trip Bus 1 Input 16 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8EF5 Trip Bus 1 Latching 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8EF6 Trip Bus 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8EF8 Trip Bus 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 8EF9 Trip Bus...

Страница 596: ...hms 0 01 F001 200 9208 Fault Report 1 System Z0 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 920C Fault REM1 TAP Z1 Magnitude 0 01 to 250 ohms 0 01 F001 300 920D Fault REM1 TAP Z1 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 920E Fault REM1 TAP Length 0 to 2000 0 1 F001 1000 920F Fault REM2 TAP Z1 Magnitude 0 01 to 250 ohms 0 01 F001 300 9210 Fault REM2 TAP Z1 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 9211 Fault REM2 TAP Length 0...

Страница 597: ...tput 20 94F0 Repeated for Direct Input Output 21 94FC Repeated for Direct Input Output 22 9508 Repeated for Direct Input Output 23 9514 Repeated for Direct Input Output 24 9520 Repeated for Direct Input Output 25 952C Repeated for Direct Input Output 26 9538 Repeated for Direct Input Output 27 9544 Repeated for Direct Input Output 28 9550 Repeated for Direct Input Output 29 955C Repeated for Direc...

Страница 598: ...and 9980 Teleprotection Clear Lost Packets 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Teleprotection Inputs Outputs Read Write Settings 9990 Teleprotection Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 9991 Teleprotection Number of Terminals 2 to 3 1 F001 2 9992 Teleprotection Number of Channels 1 to 2 1 F001 1 9993 Teleprotection Local Relay ID 0 to 255 1 F001 0 9994 Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID 0 to 255 1 F001 0 9995 Teleprotectio...

Страница 599: ...F083 0 Time out A286 Selector 1 Acknowledge 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A288 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A28A Selector 1 Bit1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A28C Selector 1 Bit2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A28E Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 1 F083 0 Time out A28F Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A291 Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 1 F084 0 Restore A292 Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 1 ...

Страница 600: ...ted for Non Volatile Latch 16 Frequency Rate of Change Read Write Setting 4 modules A900 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A901 Frequency Rate of Change 1 OC Supervision 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 200 A902 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Min 20 to 80 Hz 0 01 F001 4500 A903 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Max 20 to 80 Hz 0 01 F001 6500 A904 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 6...

Страница 601: ...0 GOOSE Analog Input 12 AA54 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 13 AA5B Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 14 AA62 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 15 AA69 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 16 AA70 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 17 AA77 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 18 AA7E Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 19 AA85 Repeated for IEC 6185...

Страница 602: ... 1 F206 none AE5A IEC 61850 Logical Node XSWIx Name Prefix 24 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none IEC 61850 GGIO4 General Analog Configuration Settings Read Write AF00 Number of Analog Input Points in GGIO4 4 to 32 4 F001 4 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input Points Configuration Settings Read Write Setting 32 modules AF10 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Value F600 0 AF11 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Deadband ...

Страница 603: ... Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled B0B7 IEC 61850 LPHD Latitude 90 to 90 degrees 0 001 F004 0 B0B9 IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Longitude 180 to 180 degrees 0 001 F004 0 B9BB IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Altitude 0 to 10000 m 1 F003 0 B0BD Reserved 3 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands Read Write Setting 6 modules B0C0 IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0C2 IEC 61850 ...

Страница 604: ...for Received Analog 12 B228 Repeated for Received Analog 13 B22A Repeated for Received Analog 14 B22C Repeated for Received Analog 15 B22E Repeated for Received Analog 16 B230 Repeated for Received Analog 17 B232 Repeated for Received Analog 18 B234 Repeated for Received Analog 19 B236 Repeated for Received Analog 20 B238 Repeated for Received Analog 21 B23A Repeated for Received Analog 22 B23C Re...

Страница 605: ... B37C Repeated for module number 5 B37F Repeated for module number 6 B382 Repeated for module number 7 B385 Repeated for module number 8 B388 Repeated for module number 9 B38B Repeated for module number 10 B38E Repeated for module number 11 B391 Repeated for module number 12 B394 Repeated for module number 13 B397 Repeated for module number 14 B39A Repeated for module number 15 B39D Repeated for m...

Страница 606: ...10 BA40 Repeated for module number 11 BA60 Repeated for module number 12 BA80 Repeated for module number 13 BAA0 Repeated for module number 14 BAC0 Repeated for module number 15 BAE0 Repeated for module number 16 Contact Inputs Read Write Setting 96 modules BB00 Contact Input 1 Name F205 Cont Ip 1 BB06 Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled BB07 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0 ...

Страница 607: ...d for Contact Input 47 BC78 Repeated for Contact Input 48 BC80 Repeated for Contact Input 49 BC88 Repeated for Contact Input 50 BC90 Repeated for Contact Input 51 BC98 Repeated for Contact Input 52 BCA0 Repeated for Contact Input 53 BCA8 Repeated for Contact Input 54 BCB0 Repeated for Contact Input 55 BCB8 Repeated for Contact Input 56 BCC0 Repeated for Contact Input 57 BCC8 Repeated for Contact I...

Страница 608: ...isabled BE31 Virtual Input 1 Name F205 Virt Ip 1 BE37 Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type 0 to 1 1 F127 0 Latched BE38 Virtual Input 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled BE39 Reserved 3 items F001 0 BE3C Repeated for Virtual Input 2 BE48 Repeated for Virtual Input 3 BE54 Repeated for Virtual Input 4 BE60 Repeated for Virtual Input 5 BE6C Repeated for Virtual Input 6 BE78 Repeated for Virtual Input 7 BE84...

Страница 609: ...Input 52 C0A0 Repeated for Virtual Input 53 C0AC Repeated for Virtual Input 54 C0B8 Repeated for Virtual Input 55 C0C4 Repeated for Virtual Input 56 C0D0 Repeated for Virtual Input 57 C0DC Repeated for Virtual Input 58 C0E8 Repeated for Virtual Input 59 C0F4 Repeated for Virtual Input 60 C100 Repeated for Virtual Input 61 C10C Repeated for Virtual Input 62 C118 Repeated for Virtual Input 63 C124 R...

Страница 610: ...or Virtual Output 39 C268 Repeated for Virtual Output 40 C270 Repeated for Virtual Output 41 C278 Repeated for Virtual Output 42 C280 Repeated for Virtual Output 43 C288 Repeated for Virtual Output 44 C290 Repeated for Virtual Output 45 C298 Repeated for Virtual Output 46 C2A0 Repeated for Virtual Output 47 C2A8 Repeated for Virtual Output 48 C2B0 Repeated for Virtual Output 49 C2B8 Repeated for V...

Страница 611: ...ng or Command C430 Test Mode Function 0 to 2 1 F245 0 Disabled C431 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C432 Test Mode Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 1 Clear Commands Read Write C434 Clear All Relay Records Command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Mandatory Read Only C435 DSP Advanced Diagnostics Active 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C436 Synchrophasor Feature Active 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Mandatory Read Write Command C437 R...

Страница 612: ... Direct Output 27 C651 Repeated for Direct Output 28 C654 Repeated for Direct Output 29 C657 Repeated for Direct Output 30 C65A Repeated for Direct Output 31 C65D Repeated for Direct Output 32 Reset Read Write Setting C750 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Control Pushbuttons Read Write Setting 7 modules C760 Control Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C...

Страница 613: ...ct Input 24 C8F0 Repeated for Direct Input 25 C8F4 Repeated for Direct Input 26 C8F8 Repeated for Direct Input 27 C8FC Repeated for Direct Input 28 C900 Repeated for Direct Input 29 C904 Repeated for Direct Input 30 C908 Repeated for Direct Input 31 C90C Repeated for Direct Input 32 Direct Input Output Alarms Read Write Setting CAD0 Direct Input Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 ...

Страница 614: ...Device 5 CBB9 Repeated for Device 6 CBDE Repeated for Device 7 CC03 Repeated for Device 8 CC28 Repeated for Device 9 CC4D Repeated for Device 10 CC72 Repeated for Device 11 CC97 Repeated for Device 12 CCBC Repeated for Device 13 CCE1 Repeated for Device 14 CD06 Repeated for Device 15 CD2B Repeated for Device 16 Remote Inputs Read Write Setting 32 modules CFA0 Remote Input 1 Device 1 to 32 1 F001 1...

Страница 615: ...Output 7 D23C Repeated for Remote Output 8 D240 Repeated for Remote Output 9 D244 Repeated for Remote Output 10 D248 Repeated for Remote Output 11 D24C Repeated for Remote Output 12 D250 Repeated for Remote Output 13 D254 Repeated for Remote Output 14 D258 Repeated for Remote Output 15 D25C Repeated for Remote Output 16 D260 Repeated for Remote Output 17 D264 Repeated for Remote Output 18 D268 Rep...

Страница 616: ... SPCSO1 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D321 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO2 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D322 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO3 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D323 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO4 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D324 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO5 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D325 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO6 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D326 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO7 ctlModel Value 0 to ...

Страница 617: ... 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO46 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO47 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO48 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D350 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO49 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D351 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO50 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D352 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO51 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D353 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO5...

Страница 618: ...Output 10 D476 Repeated for Contact Output 11 D485 Repeated for Contact Output 12 D494 Repeated for Contact Output 13 D4A3 Repeated for Contact Output 14 D4B2 Repeated for Contact Output 15 D4C1 Repeated for Contact Output 16 D4D0 Repeated for Contact Output 17 D4DF Repeated for Contact Output 18 D4EE Repeated for Contact Output 19 D4FD Repeated for Contact Output 20 D50C Repeated for Contact Outp...

Страница 619: ...odules D7A0 DCmA Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled D7A1 DCmA Inputs 1 ID F205 DCMA Ip 1 D7A7 Reserved 1 4 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 D7AB DCmA Inputs 1 Units F206 mA D7AE DCmA Inputs 1 Range 0 to 6 1 F173 6 4 to 20 mA D7AF DCmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 4000 D7B1 DCmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 20000 D7B3 Repeated for DCmA Inputs 2 D...

Страница 620: ...k 3 DCA3 Repeated for Synchrocheck 4 Phasor Measurement Unit Basic Configuration Read Write Setting DCB4 PMU 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled DCB5 PMU 1 LDInst F214 PMUx DCD6 PMU 1 IDCode 1 to 65534 1 F001 1 DCD7 PMU 1 STN F203 GE UR PMU DCDF PMU 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 DCE0 PMU 1 Class 0 to 2 1 F549 1 M CLASS DCE1 PMU 1 Format 0 to 1 1 F547 0 Integer DCE2 PMU 1 Style 0 to 1 1 F546 0 Pol...

Страница 621: ...e Setting EA4A PMU 1 User Trigger 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Phasor Measurement Unit Voltage Trigger Read Write Setting EA56 PMU 1 Volt Trigger Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled EA57 PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Low Volt 0 25 to 1 25 pu 0 001 F001 800 EA58 PMU 1 Voltage Trigger High Volt 0 75 to 1 75 pu 0 001 F001 1200 EA59 PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Pkp Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 10 EA5A PMU 1 Voltage Trigger D...

Страница 622: ...to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBE0 PMU 1 Vc Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 EBE1 PMU 1 Vc Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBE2 PMU 1 Vx Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 EBE3 PMU 1 Vx Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBE4 PMU 1 Ia Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 EBE5 PMU 1 Ia Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 EBE6 PMU 1 Ib Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F0...

Страница 623: ...alues indicate leading F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00 00 00 January 1 1970 F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are Month Day MM DD xxxx Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Day 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year xx xx YYYY 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1 F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR for...

Страница 624: ...nite Time 4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve A 5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve B 6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve C 7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve D 8 IAC Very Inv Bitmask Value Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 0 300 4 9600 8 115200 1 1200 5 19200 9 14400 2 2400 6 38400 10 28800 3 4800 7 57600 11 33600 Bitmask Element 0 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent ...

Страница 625: ... Undervoltage 3 148 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 149 Auxiliary Overvoltage 2 151 Phase Overvoltage 1 152 Phase Overvoltage 2 153 Phase Overvoltage 3 156 Neutral Overvoltage 1 157 Neutral Overvoltage 2 158 Neutral Overvoltage 3 180 Load Encroachment 190 Power Swing Detect 214 Sensitive Directional Power 1 215 Sensitive Directional Power 2 224 SRC1 VT Fuse Failure 225 SRC2 VT Fuse Failure Bitmask Element...

Страница 626: ...tal Element 20 712 Digital Element 21 713 Digital Element 22 714 Digital Element 23 715 Digital Element 24 716 Digital Element 25 717 Digital Element 26 718 Digital Element 27 719 Digital Element 28 Bitmask Element 720 Digital Element 29 721 Digital Element 30 722 Digital Element 31 723 Digital Element 32 724 Digital Element 33 725 Digital Element 34 726 Digital Element 35 727 Digital Element 36 7...

Страница 627: ...shbutton 2 902 User Programmable Pushbutton 3 903 User Programmable Pushbutton 4 904 User Programmable Pushbutton 5 905 User Programmable Pushbutton 6 906 User Programmable Pushbutton 7 907 User Programmable Pushbutton 8 908 User Programmable Pushbutton 9 909 User Programmable Pushbutton 10 910 User Programmable Pushbutton 11 911 User Programmable Pushbutton 12 912 User Programmable Pushbutton 13 ...

Страница 628: ...intenance Alert 01 18 SNTP Failure 19 Maintenance Alert 20 Maintenance Alert 21 Maintenance Alert 22 Temperature Monitor 23 Process Bus Trouble 24 Brick Trouble 25 Field RTD Trouble 26 Field TDR Trouble 27 Remote Device Offline 28 Direct Device Offline 29 Maintenance Alert 30 Any Minor Error 31 Any Major Error 33 Maintenance Alert 64 Maintenance Alert 65 IEC 61850 Data Set 66 Aggregator Error 67 U...

Страница 629: ...3 Offline 23 Ethernet Port 4 Offline 24 Ethernet Port 5 Offline 25 Ethernet Port 6 Offline 26 Test Mode Isolated 27 Test Mode Forcible 28 Test Mode Disabled 29 Temperature Warning On 30 Temperature Warning Off 31 Unauthorized Access 32 System Integrity Recovery 33 System Integrity Recovery 06 34 System Integrity Recovery 07 Bitmask Fault type Bitmask Fault type 0 NA 6 AC 1 AG 7 ABG 2 BG 8 BCG 3 CG...

Страница 630: ... 1 Zero Sequence F183 ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS F184 ENUMERATION IEC GOOSE DATASET 29 DNA 29 64 UserSt 32 30 DNA 30 65 Dataset Item 1 31 DNA 31 66 Dataset Item 2 32 DNA 32 67 Dataset Item 3 33 UserSt 1 34 UserSt 2 96 Dataset Item 32 Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot Bitmas k Slot 0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U 1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V 2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W 3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X Bitmask DCmA input output range 0 0 ...

Страница 631: ...SRC 1 2 SRC 2 3 SRC 3 4 SRC 4 5 SRC 5 6 SRC 6 Bitmask Hi Z state 0 NORMAL 1 COORDINAT ION TIMEOUT 2 ARMED 5 ARCING 9 DOWNED CONDUCTOR Bitmask Trigger type 0 None 1 Loss Of Load 2 Arc Suspected 3 Arcing 4 Overcurrent 5 Down Conductor 6 External Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress 0 No key use between real keys 23 Reset 24 User 1 1 1 25 User 2 2 2 26 User 3 3 3 27 User programmable key 1 4 4 28 User p...

Страница 632: ... MMXU1 MX A phsB cVal ang f 278 MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal mag f 279 MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal ang f 280 MMXU1 MX A neut cVal mag f 281 MMXU1 MX A neut cVal ang f 282 MMXU1 MX W phsA cVal mag f 283 MMXU1 MX W phsB cVal mag f 284 MMXU1 MX W phsC cVal mag f 285 MMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 286 MMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 287 MMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 288 MMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 289 MMXU1 MX VA phsB cVa...

Страница 633: ...U4 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 376 MMXU4 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 377 MMXU4 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 378 MMXU4 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 379 MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 380 MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 381 MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 382 MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 383 MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 384 MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 385 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal mag f 386 MMXU4 ...

Страница 634: ...XU6 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 476 MMXU6 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 477 MMXU6 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 478 MMXU6 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 479 GGIO4 MX AnIn1 mag f 480 GGIO4 MX AnIn2 mag f 481 GGIO4 MX AnIn3 mag f 482 GGIO4 MX AnIn4 mag f 483 GGIO4 MX AnIn5 mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 484 GGIO4 MX AnIn6 mag f 485 GGIO4 MX AnIn7 mag f 486 GGIO4 MX AnIn8 mag f 487 GGIO4 MX AnIn9 mag f 488 GGIO4 MX AnIn10 m...

Страница 635: ... f 152 GGIO3 MX AnIn24 mag f 153 GGIO3 MX AnIn25 mag f 154 GGIO3 MX AnIn26 mag f 155 GGIO3 MX AnIn27 mag f 156 GGIO3 MX AnIn28 mag f 157 GGIO3 MX AnIn29 mag f 158 GGIO3 MX AnIn30 mag f 159 GGIO3 MX AnIn31 mag f 160 GGIO3 MX AnIn32 mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 161 GGIO3 ST IndPos1 stVal 162 GGIO3 ST IndPos2 stVal 163 GGIO3 ST IndPos3 stVal 164 GGIO3 ST IndPos4 stVal 165 GGIO3 ST IndPos5 st...

Страница 636: ...UCER RANGE F247 ENUMERATION BRICK AC BANK ORIGIN Value Description 0 Definite Time 1 Inverse 2 FlexCurve A 3 FlexCurve B 4 FlexCurve C 5 FlexCurve D Value Month 0 January 1 February 2 March 3 April 4 May 5 June 6 July 7 August 8 September 9 October 10 November 11 December Value Day 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Value Instance 0 First 1 Second 2 Third 3 Four...

Страница 637: ...n element state and D represents bits for the type in F124 format If P bit is not set then the T represents bits for the type and D repre sents range The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix PTTTTTTTTTTTTTT and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range The left most D bit indicates whether the type is an ON or OFF type There can be a total 65535 BASE type...

Страница 638: ...nd reg ister indicates input output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input output state 17 to 32 if required The third register indicates input output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input output state 33 to 48 if required The fourth register indicates input out put state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input output state 49 to 64 if required The number of registers required is...

Страница 639: ...SCP TYPE Bitmask Default variation 0 1 1 2 2 9 3 10 Bitmask Default variation 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 Value Keypress Value Keypress Value Keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Message Down 35 User PB 5 3 7 18 0 36 User PB 6 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7 5 9 20 38 User PB 8 6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9 7 Message Left 22 Value Down 40 User PB 10 8 4 23 Reset...

Страница 640: ...igurable GOOSE retransmission scheme 0 Heartbeat 1 Aggressive 2 Medium 3 Relaxed Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 0 None 1 PDIF1 ST Str general 2 PDIF1 ST Op general 3 PDIF2 ST Str general 4 PDIF2 ST Op general 5 PDIF3 ST Str general 6 PDIF3 ST Op general 7 PDIF4 ST Str general 8 PDIF4 ST Op general 9 PDIS1 ST Str general 10 PDIS1 ST Op general 11 PDIS2 ST Str general 12 PDIS2 ST Op gene...

Страница 641: ...IOC36 ST Str general 100 PIOC36 ST Op general 101 PIOC37 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 102 PIOC37 ST Op general 103 PIOC38 ST Str general 104 PIOC38 ST Op general 105 PIOC39 ST Str general 106 PIOC39 ST Op general 107 PIOC40 ST Str general 108 PIOC40 ST Op general 109 PIOC41 ST Str general 110 PIOC41 ST Op general 111 PIOC42 ST Str general 112 PIOC42 ST Op general 113 P...

Страница 642: ... general 204 PTOC16 ST Op general 205 PTOC17 ST Str general 206 PTOC17 ST Op general 207 PTOC18 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 208 PTOC18 ST Op general 209 PTOC19 ST Str general 210 PTOC19 ST Op general 211 PTOC20 ST Str general 212 PTOC20 ST Op general 213 PTOC21 ST Str general 214 PTOC21 ST Op general 215 PTOC22 ST Str general 216 PTOC22 ST Op general 217 PTOC23 ST Str...

Страница 643: ...eral 310 RBRF16 ST OpIn general 311 RBRF17 ST OpEx general 312 RBRF17 ST OpIn general 313 RBRF18 ST OpEx general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 314 RBRF18 ST OpIn general 315 RBRF19 ST OpEx general 316 RBRF19 ST OpIn general 317 RBRF20 ST OpEx general 318 RBRF20 ST OpIn general 319 RBRF21 ST OpEx general 320 RBRF21 ST OpIn general 321 RBRF22 ST OpEx general 322 RBRF22 ST OpIn general 3...

Страница 644: ...7 GGIO1 ST Ind11 stVal 418 GGIO1 ST Ind12 stVal 419 GGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 420 GGIO1 ST Ind14 stVal 421 GGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal 422 GGIO1 ST Ind16 stVal 423 GGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal 424 GGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal 425 GGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal 426 GGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal 427 GGIO1 ST Ind21 stVal 428 GGIO1 ST Ind22 stVal 429 GGIO1 ST Ind23 stVal 430 GGIO1 ST Ind24 stVal 431 GGIO1...

Страница 645: ...0 report dataset items 526 GGIO1 ST Ind120 stVal 527 GGIO1 ST Ind121 stVal 528 GGIO1 ST Ind122 stVal 529 GGIO1 ST Ind123 stVal 530 GGIO1 ST Ind124 stVal 531 GGIO1 ST Ind125 stVal 532 GGIO1 ST Ind126 stVal 533 GGIO1 ST Ind127 stVal 534 GGIO1 ST Ind128 stVal 535 MMXU1 MX TotW mag f 536 MMXU1 MX TotVAr mag f 537 MMXU1 MX TotVA mag f 538 MMXU1 MX TotPF mag f 539 MMXU1 MX Hz mag f 540 MMXU1 MX PPV phsA...

Страница 646: ... phsB cVal mag f 629 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal ang f 630 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal mag f 631 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal ang f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 632 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal mag f 633 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal ang f 634 MMXU3 MX W phsA cVal mag f 635 MMXU3 MX W phsB cVal mag f 636 MMXU3 MX W phsC cVal mag f 637 MMXU3 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 638 MMXU3 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 639 MMXU3 MX VAr phsC cVal...

Страница 647: ... MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 733 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 734 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 735 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 736 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 737 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 738 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal ang f 739 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal mag f 740 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal ang f 741 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal mag f 742 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal ang f 743 MMXU6...

Страница 648: ... Pos stVal 835 XSWI24 ST Loc stVal 836 XSWI24 ST Pos stVal 837 XCBR1 ST Loc stVal 838 XCBR1 ST Pos stVal 839 XCBR2 ST Loc stVal 840 XCBR2 ST Pos stVal 841 XCBR3 ST Loc stVal 842 XCBR3 ST Pos stVal 843 XCBR4 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 844 XCBR4 ST Pos stVal 845 XCBR5 ST Loc stVal 846 XCBR5 ST Pos stVal 847 XCBR6 ST Loc stVal 848 XCBR6 ST Pos stVal Enumeration GOOSE data...

Страница 649: ...O1 ST Ind46 stVal 93 GGIO1 ST Ind47 q 94 GGIO1 ST Ind47 stVal 95 GGIO1 ST Ind48 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 96 GGIO1 ST Ind48 stVal 97 GGIO1 ST Ind49 q 98 GGIO1 ST Ind49 stVal 99 GGIO1 ST Ind50 q 100 GGIO1 ST Ind50 stVal 101 GGIO1 ST Ind51 q 102 GGIO1 ST Ind51 stVal 103 GGIO1 ST Ind52 q 104 GGIO1 ST Ind52 stVal 105 GGIO1 ST Ind53 q 106 GGIO1 ST Ind53 stVal 107 GGIO1 ST Ind54 q 108 GGIO1 ST I...

Страница 650: ...Ind99 stVal 199 GGIO1 ST Ind100 q 200 GGIO1 ST Ind100 stVal 201 GGIO1 ST Ind101 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 202 GGIO1 ST Ind101 stVal 203 GGIO1 ST Ind102 q 204 GGIO1 ST Ind102 stVal 205 GGIO1 ST Ind103 q 206 GGIO1 ST Ind103 stVal 207 GGIO1 ST Ind104 q 208 GGIO1 ST Ind104 stVal 209 GGIO1 ST Ind105 q 210 GGIO1 ST Ind105 stVal 211 GGIO1 ST Ind106 q 212 GGIO1 ST Ind106 stVal 213 GGIO1 ST Ind107 ...

Страница 651: ...U2 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 306 MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 307 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 308 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 309 MMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 310 MMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 311 MMXU2 MX A phsA cVal mag f 312 MMXU2 MX A phsA cVal ang f 313 MMXU2 MX A phsB cVal mag f 314 MMXU2 MX A phsB cVal ang f 315 MMXU2 MX A phsC cVal mag f 316 MMXU2 MX A phsC cV...

Страница 652: ... MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 412 MMXU5 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 413 MMXU5 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 414 MMXU5 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 415 MMXU5 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 416 MMXU5 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 417 MMXU5 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 418 MMXU5 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 419 MMXU5 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 420 MMXU5 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 421 MMXU5 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 422 MMXU5...

Страница 653: ...UIntIn2 q 514 GGIO5 ST UIntIn2 stVal 515 GGIO5 ST UIntIn3 q 516 GGIO5 ST UIntIn3 stVal 517 GGIO5 ST UIntIn4 q 518 GGIO5 ST UIntIn4 stVal 519 GGIO5 ST UIntIn5 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 520 GGIO5 ST UIntIn5 stVal 521 GGIO5 ST UIntIn6 q 522 GGIO5 ST UIntIn6 stVal 523 GGIO5 ST UIntIn7 q 524 GGIO5 ST UIntIn7 stVal 525 GGIO5 ST UIntIn8 q 526 GGIO5 ST UIntIn8 stVal 527 GGIO5 ST UIntIn9 q 528 GGIO...

Страница 654: ...22 PIOC26 ST Op general 623 PIOC27 ST Str general 624 PIOC27 ST Op general 625 PIOC28 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 626 PIOC28 ST Op general 627 PIOC29 ST Str general 628 PIOC29 ST Op general 629 PIOC30 ST Str general 630 PIOC30 ST Op general 631 PIOC31 ST Str general 632 PIOC31 ST Op general 633 PIOC32 ST Str general 634 PIOC32 ST Op general 635 PIOC33 ST Str general 636 PIOC33 S...

Страница 655: ...T Str general 728 PTOC7 ST Op general 729 PTOC8 ST Str general 730 PTOC8 ST Op general 731 PTOC9 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 732 PTOC9 ST Op general 733 PTOC10 ST Str general 734 PTOC10 ST Op general 735 PTOC11 ST Str general 736 PTOC11 ST Op general 737 PTOC12 ST Str general 738 PTOC12 ST Op general 739 PTOC13 ST Str general 740 PTOC13 ST Op general 741 PTOC14 ST Str general 74...

Страница 656: ...OpEx general 836 RBRF8 ST OpIn general 837 RBRF9 ST OpEx general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 838 RBRF9 ST OpIn general 839 RBRF10 ST OpEx general 840 RBRF10 ST OpIn general 841 RBRF11 ST OpEx general 842 RBRF11 ST OpIn general 843 RBRF12 ST OpEx general 844 RBRF12 ST OpIn general 845 RBRF13 ST OpEx general 846 RBRF13 ST OpIn general 847 RBRF14 ST OpEx general 848 RBRF14 ST OpIn general 849 RBR...

Страница 657: ... ST Loc stVal 940 CSWI26 ST Pos stVal 941 CSWI27 ST Loc stVal 942 CSWI27 ST Pos stVal 943 CSWI28 ST Loc stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 944 CSWI28 ST Pos stVal 945 CSWI29 ST Loc stVal 946 CSWI29 ST Pos stVal 947 CSWI30 ST Loc stVal 948 CSWI30 ST Pos stVal 949 XSWI1 ST Loc stVal 950 XSWI1 ST Pos stVal 951 XSWI2 ST Loc stVal 952 XSWI2 ST Pos stVal 953 XSWI3 ST Loc stVal 954 XSWI3 ST Pos stVal ...

Страница 658: ...n local access remote access or both 997 XCBR1 ST Loc stVal 998 XCBR1 ST Pos stVal 999 XCBR2 ST Loc stVal 1000 XCBR2 ST Pos stVal 1001 XCBR3 ST Loc stVal 1002 XCBR3 ST Pos stVal 1003 XCBR4 ST Loc stVal 1004 XCBR4 ST Pos stVal 1005 XCBR5 ST Loc stVal 1006 XCBR5 ST Pos stVal 1007 XCBR6 ST Loc stVal 1008 XCBR6 ST Pos stVal Enumeration Role 0 None 1 Administrator 2 Supervisor 3 Engineer 4 Operator 5 F...

Страница 659: ... PROTOCOL 0 DNP 3 0 1 IEC 60870 5 104 2 IEC 60870 5 103 F630 ENUMERATION IEC 103 ASDU TYPE 0 3 1 9 F631 ENUMERATION VIRTUAL INPUTS FOR IEC 103 Enumeration Item 0 Disabled 1 Local and Remote 2 Local 3 Remote Enumeration Item 0 OFF 1 Virtual Input 1 2 Virtual Input 2 3 Virtual Input 3 64 Virtual Input 64 ...

Страница 660: ...B 116 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin B 4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B B ...

Страница 661: ...that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN envir...

Страница 662: ...rer window click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility 2 Select the Remote AR Name from the drop down list Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right side of the window 3 With the Copy option active select a file to transfer and click the Go button The file is copied and displays in the Local list on the left side of the window 4 Repeat the process to tr...

Страница 663: ...be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the F60 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used as ...

Страница 664: ... MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitude an...

Страница 665: ...ocator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provided to...

Страница 666: ... of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro gra...

Страница 667: ...tion for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the F60 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the F60 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled on ...

Страница 668: ...two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to rece...

Страница 669: ... for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured datasets at...

Страница 670: ...CATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1 Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1 The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags a single point status...

Страница 671: ...nfigured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme If the F60 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address that is the least significant bit of the first byte is not set the address used as the destina tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address but with the multicast bit set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0...

Страница 672: ...ation process for IEC 61850 BDA Basic Data Attribute that is not structured DAI Instantiated Data Attribute DO Data Object type or instance depending on the context 842790A2 CDR Ethernet System configurator SCD file System specification tool SSD file System specification data ICD file 2 Process of creating ICD vendor 2 Creating ICD GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup ICD file 1 IED UR series OR ICD fil...

Страница 673: ...L file SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the IED name an...

Страница 674: ...ors we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable datasets ...

Страница 675: ...s node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points the l...

Страница 676: ...ataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled Oth...

Страница 677: ...O The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure C 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType element...

Страница 678: ...rocedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing p...

Страница 679: ...ile and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure C 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLevel F...

Страница 680: ...ctedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control b...

Страница 681: ...ate the F60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements Rep...

Страница 682: ...one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the target...

Страница 683: ...CSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O REPOR...

Страница 684: ...t name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 7 S1 ServerDirectory TP M ...

Страница 685: ...s S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 17 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M GENERIC SUBSTATION EVE...

Страница 686: ...ndMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 20 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 23 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S58 SetFile TP O S59 DeleteFile TP O S60...

Страница 687: ...ng A LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR Neutral current regulator ARCO Reactive power control ATCC Automatic tap changer controller AVCO Voltage control C LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH Alarm handling CCGR Cooling group control CILO Interlocking CPOW Point on wave switching CSWI Switch controller Yes CSYN Synchronizer controller F LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS FCNT Counter FCSD Curve s...

Страница 688: ... MSQI Sequence and imbalance Yes MSTA Metering statistics P LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF Differential Yes PDIR Direction comparison PDIS Distance Yes PDOP Directional overpower PDUP Directional underpower PFRC Rate of change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervision ...

Страница 689: ...ential measurements RPSB Power swing detection blocking Yes RREC Autoreclosing Yes RSYN Synchronism check or synchronizing S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SCBR Circuit breaker supervision SIMG Insulation medium supervision gas SIML Insulation medium supervision liquid SLTC Tap changer supervision SOPM Supervision of operating mechanism SPDC Monit...

Страница 690: ...th fault neutralizer Petersen coil YLTC Tap changer YPSH Power shunt YPTR Power transformer Z LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN Auxiliary network ZBAT Battery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRES Resistor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arrestor Z...

Страница 691: ...operability table Interoperability means that any required applica tion data in the device which can be coded into an IEC 60870 5 103 data type can be mapped into the IEC 60870 5 103 address space This data is recognized by any IEC 60870 5 103 master D 1 2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND The general formula for the transmitted value is Xt a X b where X is the measurand a is the...

Страница 692: ...YER Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 least significant octet first as defined in 4 10 of IEC 60870 5 4 is used exclusively in this companion stan dard Common address of ASDU One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU identical with station address More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 0 E...

Страница 693: ...quence supervision 36 Trip circuit supervision 37 I back up operation 38 VT fuse failure 39 Teleprotection disturbed 46 Group warning 47 Group alarm Earth fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 48 Earth fault L1 49 Earth fault L2 50 Earth fault L3 51 Earth fault forward meaning line 52 Earth fault reverse meaning busbar Fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 64 Start pi...

Страница 694: ...IN Auto reclosure indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 128 CB on by AR 129 CB on by long time AR 130 AR blocked Measurands in monitor direction INF Semantics 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I V 146 Measurands I V P Q 147 Measurands IN VEN 148 Measurands IL123 VL123 P Q f Generic functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attribu...

Страница 695: ...25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4 Generic functions in control direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group 243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value or attribute of a single entry 245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry 249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry ...

Страница 696: ...D 6 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 103 APPENDIX D D Voltage L3 E Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage L1 L2 MEASURAND MAX MVAL TIMES RATED VALUE 1 2 OR 2 4 ...

Страница 697: ...Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if ...

Страница 698: ...e the following used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time tag M_ST...

Страница 699: ... protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_NC_1 51 B...

Страница 700: ...ectory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M_DP_TA_1...

Страница 701: ... 48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RETURN INF...

Страница 702: ...P_ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVAT...

Страница 703: ...t number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in the outst...

Страница 704: ...s of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETER DEFAUL...

Страница 705: ...ined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected E 1 2 IEC 60870 5 104 POINT LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 da...

Страница 706: ...E 10 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin E 1 IEC 60870 5 104 APPENDIX E E ...

Страница 707: ... in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Deadban...

Страница 708: ...ary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off Ne...

Страница 709: ...nfigurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Counters...

Страница 710: ...p 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index ...

Страница 711: ...ariation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all...

Страница 712: ...sponse 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 r...

Страница 713: ... close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 01 s...

Страница 714: ...rmed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Bi...

Страница 715: ...ual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 Virt...

Страница 716: ...eeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes supported...

Страница 717: ... Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set u...

Страница 718: ...F 12 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin F 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX F F ...

Страница 719: ...r Tester with an Administrator role Tester User Password testpw GE PDC USER Role Administrator 4 In the clients conf file in the Path_to_Radius etc raddb folder add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS client where the client IP address is 10 0 0 2 the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the shared secret specified here is also configured on the UR device for successful authentication and the ...

Страница 720: ... server Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910 Update the RADIUS shared secret as specified in the clients conf file Restart the relay for the IP address and port changes to take effect 9 Verify operation Log in to the UR software as follows In the login window select Server as the Authentication Type enter the user name entered for example user name Tester and password testpw Check t...

Страница 721: ...C5 3 0x 11 February 2003 URF 040 1601 0093 C6 3 1x 11 February 2003 URF 042 1601 0093 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URF 044 1601 0093 D2 3 2x 02 June 2003 URX 084 1601 0093 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 URX 080 1601 0093 E2 3 3x 29 May 2003 URX 083 1601 0093 F1 3 4x 10 December 2003 URX 111 1601 0093 F2 3 4x 09 February 2004 URX 115 1601 0093 G1 4 0x 23 March 2004 URX 123 1601 0093 G2 4 0x 17 May 2004 URX 136 16...

Страница 722: ...DATES FOR F60 MANUAL REVISION AA4 PAGE AA3 PAGE AA4 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Update General revision including updated branding from GE Digital Energy to GE Grid Solutions Delete Deleted EAC logo from title page and deleted EAC certification from Approvals specifications because document not translated into Russian Table H 3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL REVISION AA3 PAGE AA2 PAGE AA3 CHANGE DESCRIPTION ...

Страница 723: ...ete Deleted chapter 8 on security moving content to other chapters 10 Add Added Maintenance chapter moving content from other chapters and adding new instructions to replace the battery D Add Added new appendix on IEC 60870 5 103 interoperability Table H 6 MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL REVISION Z1 PAGE Y3 PAGE Z1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Add Added CPU options U and V to order code tables in chapter 2 a n...

Страница 724: ... 2 2 8 Communications 3 24 3 24 Update Deleted references to COM 1 RS485 port in section 3 2 9 CPU Communication Ports Revised text and Figure 3 26 CPU Module Communications Wiring to include only modules T U V in section 3 2 9a 5 1 5 1 Update Updated the front panel main menu to include the CyberSentry security menu 5 16 5 16 Update Update Communications main menu to remove the SNTP Protocol subm...

Страница 725: ...ns 5 5 141 Update Added row for DeltaTime to Table 5 FlexElement Base Units 5 174 5 174 Delete Deleted section 5 8 5c Remote Devices ID of Device for Receiving GSSE GOOSE Messages meaning the Settings Input Outputs Remote Devices settings 5 257 5 257 Delete Deleted section 5 8 5c Remote Devices ID of Device for Receiving GSSE GOOSE Messages meaning the Settings Input Outputs Remote Devices setting...

Страница 726: ...d FAIL Failure FD Fault Detector FDH Fault Detector high set FDL Fault Detector low set FLA Full Load Current FO Fiber Optic FREQ Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying FTP File Transfer Protocol FxE FlexElement FWD Forward G Generator GE General Electric GND Ground GNTR Generator GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HARM Harmonic Harmonics HCT High Current Ti...

Страница 727: ...e Detector RTU Remote Terminal Unit RX Rx Receive Receiver s second S Sensitive SAT CT Saturation SBO Select Before Operate SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC Secondary SEL Select Selector Selection SENS Sensitive SEQ Sequence SFTP Secure Shell SSH File Transfer Protocol Secure File Transfer Protocol SIR Source Impedance Ratio SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SRC Source SSB Single...

Страница 728: ...H 8 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin H 2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX H H Z Impedance Zone ...

Страница 729: ...1 October 2013 GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Grid Solutions Terms and Conditions at https www gegridsolutions com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Страница 730: ...H 10 F60 Feeder Protection System GE Multilin H 3 WARRANTY APPENDIX H H ...

Страница 731: ...GE FlexLogic operands 5 147 logic 5 223 Modbus registers B 48 settings 5 223 specifications 2 20 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3 13 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING 6 19 AWG WIRE SIZE 3 12 3 36 3 39 3 41 B BANKS 5 6 5 101 5 102 BATTERY disposal 10 5 failure 7 8 replace 10 3 BATTERY FAILURE 7 8 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS F 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 3 BLOCK SETTING 5 5 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT actual ...

Страница 732: ...ations 2 27 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands 5 147 Modbus registers B 68 settings 5 81 specifications 2 23 COUNTERS actual values 6 7 settings 5 255 CRC ALARM 5 96 CRC 16 ALGORITHM B 2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY 2 27 3 11 CSA APPROVAL 2 32 CT BANKS settings 5 101 CT INPUTS 3 13 5 6 5 101 CURRENT BANK 5 101 CURRENT DEMAND 5 76 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL Modbus registers B 20 CURRENT HARMONICS 2 24 6 22...

Страница 733: ...ers F 10 binary input points F 8 binary output points F 9 control relay output blocks F 9 device profile document F 1 frozen counters F 10 implementation table F 4 Modbus registers B 31 settings 5 37 DOWNED CONDUCTOR 2 24 6 9 DOWNED CONDUCTOR See HI Z E EGD PROTOCOL actual values 6 10 6 11 Modbus registers B 49 settings 5 58 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE 2 31 ELEMENTS 5 4 EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SUPPORT 1 2 E...

Страница 734: ...8 operands 5 146 5 147 operators 5 155 rules 5 155 security 4 8 specifications 2 22 timers 5 161 worksheet 5 157 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR 5 161 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS Modbus registers B 39 settings 5 161 FLEXLOGIC locking equation entries 4 8 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS 5 312 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS 5 313 FORCE TRIGGER 6 29 FORM A RELAY high impedance circuits 3 16 outputs 3 15 3 16 specifications 2 26 FORM C R...

Страница 735: ...CE INDICATOR 1 18 7 7 INCIPIENT CABLE FAULT DETECTOR actual values 6 12 FlexLogic operands 5 149 logic 5 277 Modbus registers B 35 B 41 settings 5 275 INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR 7 7 INPUTS AC current 2 25 5 101 AC voltage 2 25 5 102 contact inputs 2 25 5 286 5 312 dcmA inputs 2 25 3 26 direct inputs 2 26 IRIG B 2 25 3 31 remote inputs 2 25 5 292 5 294 5 295 RTD inputs 2 25 3 26 virtual 5 288 INSP...

Страница 736: ...1 2 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers B 44 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT characteristics 5 206 FlexLogic operands 5 149 logic 5 207 settings 5 204 5 207 specifications 2 20 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC FlexLogic operands 5 149 logic 5 203 Modbus registers B 42 settings 5 203 specifications 2 19 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 150 logic 5 222 Modbus registers...

Страница 737: ...ers B 19 B 30 overview 1 18 reset to factory defaults 5 8 security 2 3 settings 2 3 PC SOFTWARE see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS 5 217 PER UNIT QUANTITY 5 4 PHASE ANGLE METERING 6 15 PHASE CURRENT METERING 6 17 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers B 44 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT FlexLogic operands 5 150 logic 5 181 phase A polarization 5 179 settings 5 179 5 180 specificat...

Страница 738: ...lexLogic operands 5 151 Modbus registers B 15 B 56 settings 5 197 specifications 2 19 REVISION HISTORY H 1 RF IMMUNITY 2 31 RFI CONDUCTED 2 31 RMS CURRENT 2 24 RMS VOLTAGE 2 24 ROLLING DEMAND 5 77 RS232 configuration 1 9 specifications 2 28 wiring 3 28 RS422 configuration 3 39 timing 3 40 two channel application 3 39 with fiber interface 3 41 RS485 description 3 30 specifications 2 28 RTD INPUTS a...

Страница 739: ...ration5 127 5 128 5 129 5 130 5 140 5 141 5 142 phasor measurement unit 5 121 5 126 phasor measurement unit calibration 5 131 phasor measurement unit recording 5 140 PMU Modbus registers B 76 test values 5 314 SYSLOG 5 22 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 5 103 SYSTEM LOGS 5 22 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1 5 SYSTEM SETUP 5 101 T TARGET MESSAGES 7 6 TARGET SETTING 5 5 TARGETS MENU 7 6 TCP PORT NUMBER 5 56 TECHNICAL SUPPOR...

Страница 740: ...perands 5 154 Modbus registers B 37 B 47 settings 5 83 specifications 2 23 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS Modbus registers B 35 settings 5 80 USERST 1 BIT PAIR 5 296 V VAR HOURS 2 24 6 20 VIBRATION TESTING 2 31 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values 6 4 commands 7 1 FlexLogic operands 5 153 logic 5 288 Modbus registers B 9 B 64 settings 5 288 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values 6 6 FlexLogic operands 5 153 Modbus r...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для F60

Бренд: Mitsubishi Страницы: 2

Бренд: Mitsubishi Страницы: 71

Бренд: Datalogic Страницы: 72

Бренд: TSG Страницы: 51

Бренд: RMS Страницы: 21

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 102

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 132

Бренд: NEO TOOLS Страницы: 10

Relion 670 series

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 146

Бренд: Symantec Страницы: 2

Бренд: Fisher Страницы: 46

Бренд: extronics Страницы: 21

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды